San Carlos City Council
November 10, 2025

C. Tile Finish Access Doors in Ceramic Tile Substrates:

1. Manufacturer: Karp Associates "Type DSC-210"; or equal.

2. Features
a. Frame: 14-gage stainless steel with concealed frame flange. Provide galvanized steel anchors appropriate for substrate.
b. Door: 16-gage stainless steel, fitted recessed 1 inch. Reinforce access doors over 24 inches wide to prevent sagging.
c. Hinges: Concealed spring hinges permitting 175 degree opening. d. Lock: Flush key operated stainless steel cylinder locks.

D. Fire Rated Steel Access Doors: UL 1-1/2-hour labeled, "Class B" fire-rated, and as follows:

1. Manufacturer: J. L. Industries "Style FD"; Karp Associates "Type KPR-150 FR"; Milcor "Insulated Fire-Rated Doors"; or equal.

2. Features:
a. Frame: 16-gage steel with a nominal 1-inch frame flange and integral appropriate anchors.
b. Door: 2-inch thick, fabricated of 20-gage steel face sheets, sandwich construction, with a non-combustible insulation core.
c. Hinges: Continuous stainless steel piano type hinge with stainless steel pin for the length of the door. Provide an automatic spring door closer for all doors. d. Lock: Automatic latching device with operating turn ring and interior latch release.

Provide flush key operated cylinder lock in all public areas.

E. Ceiling Access Doors: Aluminum access door, nominal 1'-6" x 1'-6" size, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

1. Manufacturer: Milcor "Type CF", Babcock-Davis, or equal.

2. Features:
a. Frame: 1/4-inch thick aluminum extrusions with mitered and welded corners and complete with hanger brackets attached.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1314
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 31 00-3
b. Cover: 1/8-inch thick aluminum plate mounted to the frame with continuous stainless steel hinge, downward swinging.
c. Latch: Automatic snap latch with removable outside handle. d. Finish: Primed for field painting under Section 09 91 00.

F. Access Doors in Sound-Rated Construction: Same as fire-rated access doors:

1. Door Panel: Double wall insulated.

2. Insulation: Minimum 1-1/2-inch thick mineral wool.

3. Hinge: Continuous piano hinge.

G. Weatherproof Access Door at Exterior:

1. Manufacturer: Nystrom "XTM Series", Cierra Products "Style C-XT"; Larsen’s "Type LXT"; or equal.

2. Features
a. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick extruded aluminum, PTD to match tile. b. Door: 20-gage galvanized steel.
c. Hinges: Continuous stainless steel piano type hinge. d. Lock: Key-operated handle on outside.
e. Insulation: 2-inch thick fiberglass.

2.02 FABRICATION
A. General: Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts and ready for installation.

B. Fabricate steel access doors and frames of continuous welded steel construction, unless otherwise indicated. Weld, fill, and grind joints smooth with adjacent surfaces to assure flush and square unit.

C. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of support shown.

D. Furnish all access doors and panels keyed alike.

2.03 FINISH
A. Galvanized Steel Doors: Manufacturer's standard prime paint.

B. Stainless Steel Doors: Buffed #4 satin finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed. Verify rough openings for doors and frames are correctly sized and located.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1315
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 31 00-4

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install drywall access doors flush with the contiguous surfaces.

B. Install stainless steel access doors after surrounding tile work is completed; set flange tight against the face of tile.

C. Install frames plumb and level in floor, wall and ceiling openings.

D. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. Coordinate installation with work of other trades.

E. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace panels or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged.

END OF SECTION 08 31 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1316
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 1
SECTION 08 33 23 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manual torsion spring overhead rolling service door for Facilities Building.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Support framing.

B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Support framing and framed opening.

C. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Product Requirements for cylinder core and keys.

D. Section 09 91 00 - Painting: Field applied finish.

E. Section 09 96 23 - Graffiti-Resistant Coatings.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/DASMA 108 - American National Standards Institute Standard Method For Testing Sectional Garage Doors And Rolling Doors: Determination Of Structural Performance Under Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

B. NFRC 102 - Test Procedure for Measuring the Steady-State Thermal Transmittance of Fenestration Systems.

C. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Element.

D. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

E. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

F. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

G. ASTM A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, MetallicCoated by the Hot-Dip Process.

H. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Overhead coiling service doors:

1. Wind Loads: Design door assembly to withstand wind/suction load of 20 psf (958 Pa) without damage to door or assembly components in conformance with ASTM E 330.

2. Cycle Life:
a. Standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycles per day maximum, and a life cycle expectancy of up to 50,000
b. Special construction for high-cycle use, and a life cycle expectancy of up to 100,000

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1317
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 2
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components.

C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

A.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Details of construction and fabrication.

4. Installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, anchoring methods, required clearances, hardware, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent construction.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) long, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic adjustments required.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of security closures.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years and approved by manufacturer.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.

1. Finish areas designated by Architect.

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect.

3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete and dry.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1318
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 3
C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid damage to installed materials.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warranty:

1. Standard Warranty: Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship.

2. Maintenance: Submit for owner’s consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement for installed products.

B. PowderGuard Finish

1. PowderGuard Max: Applied to curtain, guides, bottom bar, headplates: Manufacturer’s limited Max Finish warranty for 5 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Cornell Innovative Door Solutions, 24 Elmwood Avenue, Mountain Top, PA 18707 Telephone: (800) 233-8366
B. Follow Substitution procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions (GP 4.20).

2.2 OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS
A. Cornell Innovative Door Solutions: Model ESD10

1. Curtain: Interlocking roll-formed slats as specified following. Endlocks shall be attached to each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement. a. Flat profile type F-265 for doors up to 18 feet 4 inches (5.59 m) wide, fabricated of:
1) 18 gauge galvanized steel.

2. Slats and Hood Material & Finish:
a. Galvanized Steel: No. 5F (prefinished with GalvaNex™ Coating System), Grade 40 steel, ASTM A 653 galvanized steel zinc coating. Gauge as required to meet performance requirements.
b. Powder Coat: PowderGuard Max powder coat, custom color as selected by Architect and Owner.
(a) ALT 1: Dusty Gray RAL 7037
(b) ALT 2: Graphite Black RAL 9011
(c) ALT 3 : Granite Gray RAL 7026
(d) ALT 4: Graphite Gray RAL 7024

3. Weatherstripping:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1319
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 4
a. Bottom Bar: Replaceable, bulb-style, compressible EDPM gasket extending into guides
b. Guides: Vinyl strip sealing against fascia side of curtain c. Hood: Neoprene/rayon baffle to impede air flow above coil d. Lintel Seal: Nylon brush seal fitted at door header to impede air flow

4. Bottom Bar:
a. Galvanized Structural Steel Angles.
b. Finish to match slats

5. Guides:
a. Structural steel angles. Provide windlock bars as required, removable bellmouths, and bottom bar stoppers of same material.
b. Finish to match slats

6. Brackets:
a. Galvanized steel fabricate from minimum 3/16 inch (5 mm) steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures b. Finish to match slats

7. Finish; Bottom Bar, Guides, Headplate and Brackets:
a. Finish: PowderGuard Max powder custom color to match slats as selected and Approved by the Architect.

8. Counterbalance:
a. Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width

9. Hood:
a. 24 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced top and bottom edges. Provide intermediate support brackets as required.
b. Finish to match slats

10. Manual Operation:
a. Manual push up for doors up to 96 SF.

11. Windload Design:
a. Standard wind load shall be 20 PSF.

12. Locking:
a. Cylinder lock with thumb turned lock on the inside to prevent entrapment. b. Provide BEST E-Series Mortise Cylinder and core. Contractor shall verify compatibility of lockset and cylinder.

13. Wall Mounting Condition:
a. Interior Face-of-wall mounting
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.

B. Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1320
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 5
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.

C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only.

D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.

E. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07 92 00.

F. Install perimeter trim and closures.

G. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Test for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding or distortion.

B. Adjust hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean curtain and components using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer.

B. Remove labels and visible markings.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

END OF SECTION 08 33 23

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1321
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set UNIT SKYLIGHTS 08 62 00 - 1
SECTION 08 62 00—UNIT SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the Contract and General Conditions and all Sections within Division 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.

1.02 Section Includes:

A. Scope
This section includes everything necessary for and incidental to the execution and completion of Impact Glass glazed Curb Mount skylight or Self Flashing skylight as shown on all drawings and specified herein.

B. Work Included and is limited to, the skylight materials only and includes the following:

1. 1” Impact Glass with DuPont Sentry Glass unit skylights complete with curb mount frame for installation on flashed curb by others or pre-finished curb provided by Maxim Industries, Inc.

C. Related Work

1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for site-built wood roof curbs for unit skylights.

2. Section 07 52 16 “SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing” for roofing surrounding skylights.

3. Section 07 62 00 “Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim” for flashing and roofing terminations at unit skylight curbs.

4. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

1.03 References

1. Intertek/ ATI, Plano, Texas Testing Facility
REPORT: h0993.01-801-18-r0 TAS 201 202 203
REPORT: h0993.02-801-18-r0 AAMA A440-11
REPORT: h0993.03-801-18-r0 ASTM 1886 & 1996

2. Miami-Dade County Building Code Compliance Office
Product Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA): 15-1212.04

3. Florida Building Commission 2555 Shumard Oak Blvd., Tallahassee, FL 32399-2100 Complies with the 6th Edition of the 2017 Florida Building Code

4. Texas Department of Insurance 333 Guadalupe Austin, TX 78714-9104 Texas Department of Insurance Evaluation Report no. SK-18

5. DuPont - Kuraray SentryGlas (E.I. DuPont de Nemours & Co., Inc.) 2625 Bay Area Blvd.

Houston, TX 77058
Product Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA): 17-0808.02

6. National Accreditation & Management Institute 4794 George Washington Memorial Hwy Hayes, VA 23072
Product, Manufacturing and Quality Assurance Certifications

7. Cardinal LG Company 250 Griffin Street East Amery, WI 54001 Product Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA): 17-1108.32 – Sea Storm IGU

8. Construction Consulting Lab 1601 Luna Road Carrollton, Texas 75006 AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05 including: ASTM E283, ASTM E330, ASTM E331

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1322
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set UNIT SKYLIGHTS 08 62 00 - 2
ASTM E547, ASTM E1886, ASTM E1996—Standard specification for windows, doors & skylights

1.04 Quality Assurance:

Skylight manufacturer shall specialize in the manufacture of high performance impact and pressure resistant skylight assemblies with no less than ten years experience. Manufacturer shall maintain a Quality Assurance program with a third party monitor and provide a current certificate of compliance that manufacturer participates within a Quality Assurance Program that complies with ISO/IEC 17020 and Guide 53.

1.05 Performance Criteria
A. Impact Resistance
SentryGlas laminated glass IGU skylights must meet the requirements of Protocol TAS— 201-94. Impact resistance conforming to ASTM E1886 & ASTM E1996 Missile Level D, wind zone 4.

B. Static Air Pressure
SentryGlas laminated glass IGU skylights must meet the requirements of Protocol TAS—202-94. Test Load = +200 psf/ -200 psf, Design Load = +100.0 psf/ -100.0 psf C. Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading
SentryGlas laminated glazed IGU unit skylights must meet the requirements of Protocol TAS—203-94. Test Load = +200 psf/ -200 psf, Design Load = +100.0 psf/ -100.0 psf D. Structural Loads
SentryGlas laminated glazed IGU unit skylights must meet the requirements of Protocol TAS—202-94; Test Load = +200 psf/ -200 psf, Design Load = +100.0 psf/ -100.0 psf E. Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading
SentryGlas laminated glazed IGU unit skylights must meet the requirements of Protocol TAS—203-94; Test Load = +200 psf/ -200 psf, Design Load = +100.0 psf/ -100.0 psf F. Forced Entry Protection
SentryGlas laminated glazed IGU glazed unit skylights must meet the requirements of ASTM F588, including UL972 for all glazing materials.

G. Other standards met or exceeded and thusly included in this specification:

ASTM E330, ASTM E331, ASTM E283, ASTM E547, ASTM E1886, ASTM E1996

1.06 Submittals
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings Submit manufacturer’s standard approval drawing(s) including elevation and section details for architect review and approval.

C. Test Reports: Submit, or make available, test reports that confirm product submitted meets or exceeds specific project requirements. Test reports must be current and less than Ten (10) years.

1.07 Warranty

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1323
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set UNIT SKYLIGHTS 08 62 00 - 3
Skylight manufacturer shall provide a written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of five (5) years, or as specified, from date of installation for frame and finish, twenty (20) years for glazing.

1.08 Manufacturer
Glass Curb Mount/ Glass Self Flashing skylight(s) shall be Maxim Industries, Inc. model DGCM/DGSF as manufactured by Maxim Industries, Inc., 1630 Terre Colony Court Dallas, Texas, 214-905-2021 with sizes as shown on drawings OR APPROVED EQUAL.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Materials
A. Frame:

Frame shall be fabricated from 6063-T5/T6 aluminum extrusion with a thickness of .090 or typical wall per extrusion blueprint. Frame shall include a condensation gutter applied to the interior side of the glazing made from 6063-T5/T6 aluminum extrusion with a thickness of .090 or typical wall per extrusion blueprint. All corners shall be welded using the heliarc process..

B. DuPont SentryGlas® Laminated Impact Resistant Glass:

DuPont SentryGlas® Impact Glass shall be secured to frame per product approval drawings.

C. Aluminum Finish:

All exposed aluminum to be Clear Anodized, as selected by architect.

D. Sealants

1. Dow Corning 795 sealant
Dow Corning 795 structural sealant applied continuously around perimeter of skylight frame between the glass and frame.

E. Fasteners
No fasteners are supplied but must conform to product control approval drawings. Prepositioned fastener holes are provided.

F. Site Built Curb per drawings.

2.02 Assembly
All skylights shall be factory assembled and factory glazed.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 Site Inspection
Installer shall notify the architect, specifier or consultant of any structural or dimensional deficiencies immediately. No work shall proceed without the correction of all deficiencies or written authorization is given to proceed.

3.02 Installation

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1324
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set UNIT SKYLIGHTS 08 62 00 - 4
Skylight shall be installed in strict accordance with drawings, section details, elevations, and installation drawings and instructions provided by Maxim Industries Inc. Any deviation must be within the product approvals and shall only be through written authorization from Maxim Industries, Inc. and approved by the architect, specifier or consultant.

A. Sealants
No sealants shall be applied to aluminum if temperature is below 32 degrees F.

3.03 Protection
Protection of skylights during construction shall be the responsibility of the general contractor or project manager.

3.04 Cleaning
A. General Cleaning
Installer shall remove all protective coverings immediately from frames and/or domes and prevent exposure to sunlight or UV light and shall leave installation free from heavy debris and/or sealant markings.

B. Polycarbonate Cleaning
Final cleaning must be in strict accordance with skylight and thermoplastic manufacturers recommendations and shall be by the general contractor or project manager. Cleaning instructions shall be located on manufacturers label. Thermoplastic cleaning instructions from PalRam Americas, Covestro LLC and Gallina USA must be followed exactly and are available upon request.

END OF SECTION 08 62 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1325
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00-1
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. All necessary door hardware to complete the Project, except those items specifically mentioned to be furnished by other Sections.

2. Wherever items of door hardware are not definitely specified but are required for proper completion and/or operation of doors, or a hardware item may no longer be available, furnish hardware in type, quality, and finish suitable for the service required and comparable to that specified for similar conditions, and notify the Architect immediately.

B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: Furnish templates to Sections 08 33 23 and Section 08 41 13 for door and frame preparation.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications

2. Section 08 33 23 – Overhead Coiling Door

3. Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

4. Section 08 31 00 – Access Doors and Panels

5. Division 26 - Electrical: Power supply to electric hardware devices

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions (GP 4.19).

B. Hardware Schedule: Submit a complete schedule of door hardware for review. Reference items clearly to groups specified, door-type designations shown, location, and other pertinent data. Verify suitability, function, thickness of members, or other factors affecting appropriate selection. List manufacturer's names or suitable abbreviation to facilitate reviewing, opposite each item scheduled.

1. List only readily obtainable hardware that appears in current catalogs. Do not deliver hardware until schedule has been accepted by the Architect.

2. After the hardware schedule is accepted by the Architect, provide one copy of the accepted hardware schedule to each trade whose work may be affected.

C. Product Data: Submit catalog cuts and product data on each different type of hardware included in hardware schedule. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions.

D. Samples: Prior to delivery of any hardware to the site, submit one sample of each class or type of hardware to the Architect for final review. Affix labels to fully identify manufacturer, class or type, and location on the Project. After review, accepted samples may be obtained from the Architect for installation on the Project, providing such samples are picked up within seven days of notification of acceptance.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1326
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00-2

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier Qualifications: Company experienced and specializing in supplying commercial door hardware. The hardware supplier shall employ a member of the Door Hardware Institute (DHI) who is a Certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to prepare the hardware schedule submittal and be available for consultation with the Owner’s Representative and Architect.

Upon completion of the building, check the installation and disclose any misapplication of hardware.

B. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who has completed installations similar in material, design, and extent to that required for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance.

C. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Comply with 2019 California Building Code and NFPA 80 for requirements applicable to fire-rated doors and frames, tested according to NFPA 252. Provide fire-labeled hardware at fire-rated openings.

2. Egress Doors: Comply with CBC Section 1010 and applicable requirements of NFPA 101 "Life Safety Code".

3. Electrified Door Hardware: Comply with CBC Section 1010; provide hardware listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

4. Accessibility: Comply with CBC Section 1133B.2 and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design".

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hardware with items packed separately, complete and ready for installation with necessary fittings, trim, fasteners, and accessories. Mark packages clearly for identification in accordance with Hardware Schedule. Deliver hardware so that work may progress without delay or interruption.

B. Package all items of hardware and each lockset, latchset, exit device, and door control/closer in its individual package marked with manufacturer's name, type number, and name of item.

Furnish each item complete with necessary fastenings, wrenches, spanners, installation instructions, and templates. Indelibly, legibly, and carefully mark each package with an item number corresponding to the door number and hardware group number as indicated on the opening schedule, the approved door Hardware Schedule, and the Drawings and details.

C. Protect hardware from damage before, during, and after installation.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware.

B. Manufacture all hardware to template. Provide templates and, if necessary, the physical hardware to fabricator of doors and frames in ample time to facilitate the work.

C. Coordinate electrical and security requirements of hardware items with related sections.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1327
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00-3

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide extended warranty for the following hardware items in accordance with requirements of Division 1. Warrant that hardware shall be free of defects in material and workmanship and that it will not deteriorate excessively, or otherwise fail to perform as required.

1. Hinges: Life of building.

2. Door Closers: Ten years.

3. Locks: Five years.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.

B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General: Numbers in Hardware Schedule refer to those of the first named manufacturer below.

Equivalent products by the other named manufacturers are also acceptable.

B. Butt Hinges: Arcadia, Stanley, Hager, Lawrence, McKinney.

C. Locksets and Latchsets: BEST, Arcadia, Schlage (SCH) D. Cylinders: BEST Lock Core
E. Exit Devices: Von Duprin (VON), Precision Hardware Inc.

F. Overhead Closers: LCN, Dorma, Norton.

G. Manual and Automatic Flush Bolts: Ives (IVE), Trimco, Door Controls Inc.

H. Stops: Ives (IVE), Trimco, Rockwood.

I. Overhead Holders/Stops: Glynn-Johnson (GLY), Rixson, Rockwood.

J. Gasketing and Thresholds: Pemko (PEM), NGP, Reese.

K. Protection Plates and Push/Pull Plates: Ives (IVE), Trimco, Rockwood.

L. Magnetic Door Locking System: Securitron.

2.2 HINGES
A. Standard: Meeting ANSI A156.1, Grade 1.

B. Type: Butt hinges of the five-knuckle non-rising removable pin with button tip and plug, fullymortised, minimum of two bearings, stainless steel pins, and as follows:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1328
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00-4

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Steel hinges with steel pins, minimum of two ball bearings, and plated to match required finish.

2. Outswinging Doors to the Exterior: Stainless steel or non-ferrous material, with nonremovable pins (NRP) of the setscrew type.

C. Hinge Size:

1. Doors 1-3/4" thick and up to 37" wide: 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 inch butt hinges provided with at least two ball bearings or life-span bearings.

2. Doors over 1-3/4" thick or over 37" wide: 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 inch extra-heavy duty butt hinges provided with at least four ball bearings.

3. Butt hinges for doors thicker than noted above or with unusual trim conditions which would interfere with the full opening of the door shall be provided with hinges of sufficient size to adequately support the door weight and of sufficient width to clear adjacent trim.

D. Number of Hinges Per Door Leaf:

1. Doors up to 60 Inches High: Two hinges per door leaf.

2. Doors up to 90 Inches High: Three hinges per door leaf.

3. Doors over 90 Inches High: Three hinges plus one additional butt hinge for each additional 30 inches in height over 90 inches, or fraction thereof.

2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, AND CYLINDERS
A. Standards:

1. Cylindrical Locks: Meeting ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1.

2. Mortise Locks: Meeting ANSI A156.13, Grade 1.

3. Deadbolt Locks: Meeting ANSI A156.5, Grade 1.

B. Lock Type: Where locksets or latchsets are scheduled, provide scheduled lockset with BEST E-series Mortise Cylinder and cores, with backsets per door manufacturer’s recommendation unless otherwise noted. Provide all locks from the same manufacturer. Contractor shall verify compatibility of lockset and cylinder.

C. Strikes: Provide each lockset, latchset, and deadlock with a strike and a strike box. Provide standard type strikes with extended lips where required to protect adjacent trim from being marred by latch bolt. Verify cutout types provided in metal frames.

D. Construction Cylinders: Provide construction keying for cylinders as required and keys for use during construction. Owner’s Representative will remove construction cores and return to Contractor.

2.4 DOOR CLOSERS
A. Standards: Meeting ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1329
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00-5
B. Type: Rack and pinion construction, steel spring, fully hydraulic action, non-handed, cast iron or cast aluminum body, non-gumming, non-freezing hydraulic fluid requiring no seasonal adjustment for temperature.

C. Closer Force: Capable of having spring force increased by 50 percent by adjustment without removing from the door, and effecting a maximum operating pressure on the door as follows:

1. Interior Doors: 4.75 lbf.

2. Exterior Accessible Doors: 4.75 lbf..

3. Exterior Non-Accessible Doors: 8.25 lbf.

4. Fire-Rated Doors: 14.75 lbf.

D. Overhead Surface-Mounted Closers:

1. Out-swinging Doors to the Exterior: Parallel arm closers, with the closer mounted on the inside of the door.

2. In-swinging Doors into Rooms: Mount closers on the room side on the door. Corner brackets are not permitted. Supply drop plates where required.

E. Features: Positive back-check action near the outer limit of the opening cycle, located to protect door, frame, trim, and hardware; separate adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and back check; hydraulic regulation by tamperproof, noncritical screw valves adjustable only with a hex wrench. Where specified, provide with hold-open arm and built-in positive stop.

2.5 EXIT DEVICES (PANIC HARDWARE)
A. Standards: Meeting ANSI A156.3, Grade 1; as required to fulfill all requirements of NFPA 80 "Fire Doors and Windows", NFPA 101 "Life Safety Code", and UL.

B. Single Doors: Rim-type exit devices, typical, unless otherwise scheduled.

C. Pairs of Doors: Wherever possible, provide pairs of doors with two concealed vertical rod devices to avoid use of an astragal and coordinator. Provide coordinators where astragals are required.

D. Outside Trim and Levers: Compatible with other door hardware in style and finish.

2.6 MAGNETIC LOCKS
A. All electromagnetic locks shall be manufactured by Securitron Magnalock Corp., Sparks, NV, an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer.

1. Verify magnetic door lock system, controls, and accessories with Owner.

B. Locks shall be capable of providing a pull-apart or tensile holding force of at least 1,200 pounds. A laboratory test certifying the minimum holding force shall be submitted by the manufacturer upon request.

C. Electromagnetic locks shall have a lifetime replacement warranty.

D. Locks shall be dual voltage with no field adjustment necessary to select voltage.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1330
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00-6
E. Locks shall not consume more than three and (3 W) watts of power (250mA @ 12VDC) and (150mA @ 24VDC).

F. Locks shall not exceed 42 cubic inches (8 inches x 3 inches x 1.75 inches) in size.

G. Locks shall be fully sealed in resin to provide tamper and weather proofing.

H. Mount locks using two .25 inch x 2.25 inch machine screws into blind finishing nuts with steel threads that extend through the entire body of the lock.

I. Mount strike plates to provide a "floating" movement to assure automatic self-alignment with the lock.

J. Finish is architectural brushed stainless steel, other finishes available by selecting optional dress covers.

K. Hardware accessories shall include brackets, housings, and dress covers.

L. Ten feet of jacketed stranded conductor shall be provided for electrical connection.

M. Anti-tamper caps shall be provided for any exposed holes.

N. The locks and strikes shall be plated to provide corrosion resistance.

2.6 FLUSH BOLTS
A. Standards:

1. Manual Flush Bolts: Meeting ANSI A156.16, Grade 1.

2. Automatic Flush Bolts and Coordinators: Meeting ANSI A156.3.

B. Flush Bolts: Provide at top and bottom edge of the inactive leaf of pairs of doors. Provide bottom rod with 12 inch long operating rod and top rod of sufficient length so that operating lever is less than six feet above the floor.

C. Dustproof Strikes: Provide for bottom bolts, of type required for appropriate finish floor condition.

D. Coordinators: Flat bar type with head filler, mounted to the head frame on top of the metal stop, unless otherwise scheduled. Provide a carry bar at each pair of doors equipped with overlapping astragal. Coordinators to be mechanically operated, and capable of holding the active door of a pair open until the inactive leaf has preceded it in the closing cycle.

2.7 AUXILIARY HARDWARE
A. Standards: Meeting ANSI A156.16.

B. Door Stops: Floor type or wall bumper type as scheduled. Provide each door leaf with a stop of proper size and height to prevent door from hitting wall or fixed objects. Built-in stops in door closers and overhead stops, where called for, shall satisfy this requirement.

1. Wall Stops: No visible fasteners.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1331
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00-7

2. Floor Stops: Of height required by floor conditions, fastened by means of machine screws and expansion anchors.

C. Silencers: Gray rubber, non-marring configuration for metal or wood doors. Provide each door with a pressed-metal frame with tamper resistant rubber silencers. Provide each single door with three silencers, each pair of doors with four. Omit at doors to receive gasketing.

2.8 THRESHOLDS, DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING
A. Provide as scheduled and detailed. Install with countersunk, flat-head screws, of same material and finish as item being attached at all applied thresholds, door bottoms, stops, and door gasketing.

B. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide UL-listed smoke seals on three sides of door frames at head and jambs.

C. Threshold Height: Maximum 1/2 inch. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2.

2.9 DOOR PLATES
A. Standards: Meeting ANSI A156.6.

B. Protection Plates: Stainless steel, with all edges beveled. Provide as scheduled and detailed.

1. Thickness: Minimum of 0.050-inch.

2. Width: Protection plates shall be 1-1/2-inch less than door width at single doors, 1-inch less than leaf width at pairs of doors. Mop plates shall extend the full width of the door.

3. Height: Kickplates shall be 10 inches high; mop plates shall be 6 inches high.

C. Combination Push-Pull Plates: Minimum 0.050-inch thick, stainless steel, beveled edges.

D. Install plates using countersunk spanner-type stainless steel #6 oval head screws.

2.10 KEYS AND KEYING
A. Keying: Meet with Owner's Representative to determine final keying requirements. Key and masterkey locks as directed by Owner's Representative to the Owner's existing system.

B. Core Type: Small Format Interchangeable Core (SFIC) system for Best style small format keyway. To be confirmed by Owner’s Representative.

C. Number of Keys, to be confirmed by Owner’s Representative:

1. Grand Master Key (Opens every door): 4 keys

2. Keyed Alike Sub-master Key (Opens office, janitor closet and public restroom doors): 8 keys

3. Keyed Different Individual Key (Opens individual rooms): 3 keys per door.

4. Each Door: 3 keys.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1332
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00-8
D. Identification: Emboss face of each cylinder plug and key with minimum 3-digit visual key control system. Stamp all keys "DO NOT DUPLICATE".

E. Owner’s Representative will remove construction cylinders and install permanent cylinders.

F. Provide a construction keying system for Contractor's and/or Owner's use as required during construction. Retain construction keys and inserts and turn over to the Owner upon completion of construction.

2.11 FINISHES
A. Typical Hardware:

1. Typical Interior Locations: See hardware groups schedule.

2. Exterior Locations, Unheated Spaces Exposed to the Weather, and Where Scheduled:

BHMA 630 (US32D) - satin stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.

B. Exposed Overhead Door Closers: BHMA 689 - spray lacquer aluminum color, unless otherwise noted.

C. Thresholds: BHMA 719 - mill finish extruded aluminum.

D. Weatherstripping and Gasketing: BHMA 628 (US28), clear anodized aluminum, unless otherwise noted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors, frames, and other surfaces to receive door hardware and report all defects which might adversely affect the installation or function of the hardware. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.

B. Coordinate and be responsible for the proper fabrication of all work or material to receive hardware. No extra cost will be allowed because of changes or corrections necessary to facilitate the proper installation and operation of the hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of ANSI/NFPA 80, and DHI. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

B. Accessibility: Conform to CCR Title 24 and ADA requirements for positioning and installing hardware.

C. Hardware Attachments: Provide with all necessary screws, bolts, and other devices or fastenings of suitable size and type to secure the hardware in position for heavy use and long life as recommended by the manufacturer, harmonizing as to material and finish. Secure to concrete with expansion sleeve anchors; plastic or "Rawl" plugs not acceptable. Provide fullthreaded "Phillips" head screws of sufficient length to firmly engage backing, finished to match hardware. Install closers on hollow metal doors with through-bolts.

D. Thresholds: Set in bead of sealant.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1333
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00-9
E. Keying:

1. Coordinate with the Owner’s Representative the changeover to permanent cores at completion of project.

2. Owner’s Representative will remove construction plugs and will return plugs to Contractor.

3.3 MAINTENANCE RELATED ITEMS
A. Furnish one set of installation and adjusting tools and one set of maintenance manuals for locksets, exit devices, door controls/ closers, and floor hinges to the Owner’s Representative.

3.4 ADJUSTMENTS AND INSPECTION
A. Closers: Regulate and adjust to comply with fire and accessibility requirements prior to final inspection.

B. During the installation of hardware a periodic inspection shall be made by the Contractor in company with a representative of the Architect and the hardware supplier or his agent. Any hardware improperly installed shall be removed and reinstalled at the Contractor's expense. At completion of the work a final inspection shall be made by the above parties. Make any and all adjustments recommended by any of the above parties.

3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: The accompanying Hardware Schedule is furnished for whatever guidance and assistance it may afford the Contractor but shall not necessarily be considered as entirely inclusive.

B. Examine the Drawings and the Specifications to determine the extent, quality, and function of hardware required. Furnish all necessary architectural finish hardware to complete the work.

C. Should any door or item be inadvertently omitted from the scheduled hardware, provide such door or item with the same hardware as required for similar purposes. Should it be determined that the hardware scheduled is not suitable due to detail or size of member, provide hardware of proper size, type and function, similar in operation and equivalent to that specified.

D. Whether listed or not, provide latching lockset, door closer, and smoke gasketing at firelabeled doors.

END OF SECTION 08 71 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1334
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set LOUVERS & VENTS 08 90 00-1
SECTION 08 90 00 – LOUVERS & VENTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Extruded aluminum CMU block vent louvers for Facilities Building.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
B. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry
C. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications
D. Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
E. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants
F. Section 09 91 00 – Painting

1.03 REFERENCES
A. AAMA 2604 – High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.

B. AAMA 2605 – High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.

C. AMCA 500-L – Test Methods for Louvers.

D. AMCA 511 – Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices.

E. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures F. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

G. ASTM B221 – Standard Specifications for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

H. ASTM D822 – Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposure of Paint and Related Coatings.

I. ASTM D4214 – Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films.

J. ASTM D2244 – Standard Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

K. ASTM E330 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

L. Living Building Challenge – Red List Chemicals

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined in Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: For each product to be used, including:

1. Manufacturer’s product data including performance data.

2. Installation Instructions

3. Maintenance and Operations Manuals

4. Health Product Declarations (HPDs) and Declare Labels C. Shop Drawings

1. Submit shop drawings indicating materials, construction, dimensions, accessories, and installation details.

D. Samples

1. Submit color chip sample for units with factory-applied paint.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1335
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set LOUVERS & VENTS 08 90 00-2

1. The manufacturer shall have implemented the management of quality objectives, continual improvement, and monitoring of customer satisfaction to assure that customer needs and expectations are met.

2. Manufacturer shall have International Living Future (ILFI) Just Label or equivalent.

B. Production Qualifications:

1. Louvers shall be licensed to bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. Ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 511 and comply with AMCA Certified Ratings Program. AMCA Certified Ratings Seal applies to air performance and water penetration ratings.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material.

B. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoors, protected from damage and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by the manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall provide a standard limited warranty for louver systems for a period of 1 year from date of installation, no more than 18 months after shipment from manufacturing plant. When notified in writing from the Owner of a manufacturing defect, manufacturer shall promptly correct deficiencies without cost to the owner.

B. Manufacturer shall provide 20 year limited warranty for fluoropolymer-based finish on aluminum substrates.

1. Finish Coating shall not peel, blister, chip, crack, or check.

2. Chalking, fading, or erosion of finish when measured by the following tests:
a. Finish coating shall not chalk in excess of 8 numerical ratings when measured in accordance with ASTM D4214.
b. Finish coating shall not change color or fade in excess of 5 NBS units as determined by ASTM D2244 and ASTM D822
c. Finish coating shall not erode at a rate in excess of .01 mils/year confirmed by Florida test samples.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Industrial Louvers Inc. (ILI) - Contact: 511 South 7th Street, Delano, MN 55328; Telephone:
(763) 972-2981; https://www.industriallouvers.com/request-for-quote/ OR EQUAL.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1336
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set LOUVERS & VENTS 08 90 00-3
B. Substitutions: Follow Substitution procedure outlined in Division 1 General Provisions 4.20 Substitutions.

C. Other Available Manufacturers – subject to compliance with requirements stated within.

1. Activar Air Louvers – Contact: 6285 Randolph St,
Commerce CA 90040, (800) 554-6077, [email protected]

2.02 BLOCK VENT LOUVERS
A. Model: BV as manufactured by Industrial Louvers or Equal. = 1. Frame and blades shall be 4 inches (102 mm) deep and thickness shall be .125 inch (3 mm) extruded aluminum 6063 alloy. Sill and jamb frames shall be continuously welded to help prevent water penetration to interior wall construction. Blades are attached by means of all-welded construction. 18 x 14 mesh aluminum wire insect screens shall be mounted on the interior. ==
== 2. Model BV: 15-5/8 inches wide by 7-5/8 inches high (397 mm by 194 mm).

3. Finish: 3 coat Fluropolymer Kynar 500. Colors as specified below. Provide samples to be approved by the Architect.
a. ALT 1: Charcoal
b. ALT 2: Custom Dark Gray to match RAL 7037 Dusty Gray c. ALT 3: Custom RAL color as selected by the Architect ==

2.03 LOUVER AND VENT ACCESSORIES
A. Exterior Aluminum Sill: Provide sill flashing of same material and finish as louvers where indicated on the drawings.

B. Louver Screens: Provide framed removable, re-wire-able screens for exterior louvers.

1. Bird Screen:
a. Stainless Steel: Stainless Steel, ½ in by 16 ga. (12.7 mm x 1.6 mm), welded

2. Insect Screen:
a. 18 x 18 mesh stainless steel 0.009 inch (0.23 mm) diameter wire.

C. Blank Off Panels:

1. Non-Insulated Blank Off Panels factory installed with removable screws and foam tape gaskets:
a. 0.080 inch (2 mm) aluminum sheet

2. Insulated Blank Off Panels factory installed with removable screws and foam tape gaskets:
a. 1 inch (25 mm) thick and to be faced on both sides with 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick aluminum sheet. Panels to be fabricated with rigid fiberboard core having an R-Value of 4. Panel perimeter frame to be a 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) thick extruded aluminum Z shape. Panels to be finished to match louvers on one side only.
b. 2 inch (51 mm) thick and to be faced on both sides with 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick aluminum sheet. Panels to be fabricated with rigid fiberboard core having an R-Value of 8. Panel perimeter frame to be a 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) thick extruded aluminum Z shape. Panels to be finished to match louvers on one side only.

2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication Requirements:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1337
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set LOUVERS & VENTS 08 90 00-4

1. Performance: Fabricate as required for optimum performance with respect to water penetration, strength, durability, and appearance.

2. Size: Fabricate louvers in walls to meet dimensions indicated on Contract Documents.

3. Field Measurement: Verify size, location, and placement of louvers before fabrication.

4. Shop Assembly:
a. Fabricate to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints and field assembly of units.
b. Preassemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling.
c. Clearly mark units for reassemble and coordinated installation.

5. Accessories: Include supports, anchorages and accessories required for complete assembly.

6. Vertical Mullions: Provide vertical mullions of type and spacing indicated but not further apart than recommended by the manufacturer.

7. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at horizontal joints between louver units except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated.

8. Connections: Join frame and blade members to one another by mechanical fastener, except where field bolted connections between frame members are made necessary by size of louvers.

9. Spacing: Maintain equal blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.

2.06 FINISHES (FACTORY)
A. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory.

Protect finishes on exposed surfaces prior to shipment. Remove scratches and blemishes from exposed surfaces that will be visible after completing finishing process. Provide color as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by architect.

B. Standard mill finish.

C. Prime Coat:

1. Apply alkyd prime coat following chemical cleaning and pretreatment.

2. Primer preparation for field painting
D. Fluorocarbon Three Coat Coating

1. Coating shall conform to AAMA 2605.

2. Louvers to be finished with a minimum 1.4 mil (0.035 mm) thick full strength 70% resin, 3 coat Fluoropolymer system.

3. All aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned, etched, and given a chrome-free conversion pretreatment before application of coating. Coating shall be ILFI LBC Red List Free.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean opening thoroughly prior to installation

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1338
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set LOUVERS & VENTS 08 90 00-5
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install louvers at locations as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install louvers plumb, level, in plane of wall, and in alignment with adjacent work.

C. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 07 92 00.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean louver surface in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Touch-up paint, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 08 90 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1339
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set NON-STRUCTURAL

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
09 22 16-1
SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTUAL COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special Provisions, and other Technical Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 03 15 00 Drilled Dowels and Epoxy Anchors
B. Section 05 05 19 Expansion Anchors, Screws and Powder-Actuated Fasteners C. Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing
D. Section 05 40 00 Structural Cold-Formed Metal Framing E. Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
F. Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board for interior non-load bearing, metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies.

1.4 REFERENCES, CODES, AND STANDARDS
The following references, codes, and standards are hereby made a part of this Section and cold formed steel work shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements.

A. "Cold- Formed Steel Design Manual", AISI S100, latest edition.

B. California Building Code, 2022 Edition.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1340
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set NON-STRUCTURAL

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
09 22 16-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following coldformed metal framing products manufactured by members of the SFIA, or equal:

1. Clark Dietrich Building Systems.

2. The Steel Network Inc.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards: Design according to AISI's S100 “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”.

1. AISI S200 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – General Provisions”.

2. AISI S201 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Product Standard”.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade 33 and coating G90.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1341
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set NON-STRUCTURAL

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
09 22 16-3

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or equal:
1) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; Maxtrak Slotted deflection track 2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track.
3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series.
4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or equal:
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. b. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; BlazeFrame Deflection Track c. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

G. G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1342
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set NON-STRUCTURAL

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
09 22 16-4
I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch.

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

J. Shaped Furring: With slotted or non-slotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1343
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set NON-STRUCTURAL

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
09 22 16-5

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fireresistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.

3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1344
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set NON-STRUCTURAL

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
09 22 16-6

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.

D. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing.

2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

E. E. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1345
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set NON-STRUCTURAL

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
09 22 16-7
END OF SECTION 09 22 16

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1346
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARDS 09 28 13-1
SECTION 09 28 13 – CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General and Technical Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Water-resistant cementitious Backerboard for ceramic wall tile on Restroom plumbing chase.

2. Water-resistant cementitious Backerboard for overhang at existing adjacent building.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing for structural framing.

2. Section 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing for non-structural framing that supports tile assemblies.

3. Section 09 30 00 Tiling

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions (GP 4.19).

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

C. CALGreen Submittals: Submit product data in accordance with Division 1.

1. Product Data for CALGreen 5.504.4.1 Adhesives, Sealants, Caulks: Product Data and material safety data sheets (MSDS) for adhesives and sealants used on the project, indicating VOC content of each product used.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage.

Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the following applicable standards unless otherwise specified herein:

1. CBC—“California Building Code,” 2022 Edition and all applicable local Building Codes.

2. Classification: Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9, ASTM A108.11 and ASTM C 1325

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1347
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARDS 09 28 13-2

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. For CALGreen 5.504.4.1, adhesives, sealants and caulks shall comply with local or regional air pollution control or air quality management district rules or SCAQMD Rule1168 VOC limits, as shown in Tables 5.504.4.1 and 5.504.4.2 in the California Building Code.

2.2 CEMENTITIOUS BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 MANUFACTURER/PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or equal:

1. National Gypsum Company, PermaBASE®Cement Board.

2. James Hardie Industries, Hardie Panel Cement Board.

B. Cement Backerboard Panel Physical Characteristics

1. Core: Cementitious, water-durable.

2. Surface: Fiberglass mesh on front and back

3. Edges: EdgeGuard or equal.

4. Long Edges: Tapered

5. Overall Thickness: 1/2 inch

6. Panel complies with requirements of ASTM C 1325 and ANSI A118.9

7. Density: 72 lbs. Per cu. ft.

8. Water Absorption: Not greater than 8% when tested for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM C 473

9. Suitable for exposure to temperatures up to 220 degrees F.

C. Underlayment Physical Characteristics

1. Core: Cementitious, water-durable

2. Surface: Fiberglass mesh on front and back

3. Edges: EdgeGuard or equal.

4. Long Edges: Tapered

5. Overall Thickness: 1/4 inch

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1348
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARDS 09 28 13-3

6. Panel complies with requirements of ASTM C 1325 and ANSI A118.9

7. Density: 72 lbs per cu. ft.

8. Water Absorption: Not greater than 8% when tested for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM C 4734.

D. Liquid Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane [USG or Equal]

1. Permeance rating (0.38 perms at 20 mils dry thickness) of any liquid waterproofing membrane when tested to ASTM E96 Procedure E.

2.4 FASTENERS
A. 316 Stainless Steel fasteners shall be approved by Engineer and Cement Board Manufacturer for use near corrosive Marine Environment.

B. Screws (#10-16 Hi-Lo) or Equal.

1. Wafer head, 316 stainless steel, corrosion-resistant

2. Overall Length: 1 5/8 inch [41 mm]

3. For use with wood framing and complying with ASTM C 1002.

C. Screws (#8-18, #10-16 Drill Point) or Equal.

1. Wafer head, 316 stainless steel, corrosion-resistant

2. Overall Length: 1 5/8 inch [41 mm]

3. For use with 20 to 14 ga. Steel framing and complying with ASTM C 1002.

D. Nails (1-1/2 in. [38 mm] 316 stainless steel roofing nails).

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Cement Board: Mold-resistant tape.

2. Tile Backer Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backer Panels:

1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2. Water-Resistant Cementitious Backer Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering cement board panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1349
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARDS 09 28 13-4

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or equal:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.
b. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and ANSI A108.11.

B. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 1002.

C. Cement board should be cut to size with a knife and straight edge. A power saw should be used only if it is equipped with a dust-collection device. Installer should wear NIOSH/MSHA approved dust mask.

D. For wall application, fasten Cement Board panels to framing with specified fasteners. Drive fasteners into field of panels first, working toward ends and edges. Hold panels in firm contact with framing while driving fasteners. Space fasteners maximum 8 in. (203 mm) O.C. [U.O.N.] for walls, 6 in. (152 mm) O.C. [U.O.N.] for ceilings, with perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 in. (10 mm) and less than 5/8 in. (16 mm) from ends and edges. Drive nails and screws so bottoms of heads are flush with panel surface to ensure firm panel contact with framing. Do not overdrive fasteners.

E. 316 Stainless Steel fasteners shall be approved by Engineer and Cement Board Manufacturer for use near corrosive marine Environment.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1350
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARDS 09 28 13-5
F. Prefill joints with tile-setting mortar or adhesive and then immediately embed Tile Backer Tape and level joints.

3.3 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer recommendations
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or cement board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining cement panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with cement panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit cement panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut cement panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of cement board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off soundflanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing cement panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.4 APPLYING INTERIOR CEMENT BOARD
A. Single-Layer Application:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1351
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARDS 09 28 13-6

1. On ceilings, apply cement panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply cement panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply cement panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply cement panels to supports with approved 316 stainless steel drill screws.

B. Laminating to Substrate: Where cement panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of cement board), comply with cement board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten cement panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.5 FINISHING CEMENT BOARD
A. General: Treat cement board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare cement board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over cement board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Cement Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.

3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.

4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 00 "Painting."
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Apply Liquid Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane per manufacturer’s recommendations.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1352
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARDS 09 28 13-7

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from finishing compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-cement board surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during finishing application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 09 28 13

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1353
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00-1
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General and Technical Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Gypsum Board for Facilities Building Storage Room interior ceiling, (9.05).

2. Gypsum Board for Facilities Building skylight wells, Restroom ceiling, and Storage Room wall (9.06).

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05 40 00 “Cold Formed Metal Framing”, for structural framing.

2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing that supports tile assemblies.

3. Section 09 96 23 “Graffiti-Resistant Coatings”, for restroom ceiling.

4. Section 09 91 00 “Painting”.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. CALGreen Submittals: Submit product data in accordance with Division 1.

1. Product Data for CALGreen 5.504.4.1 Adhesives, Sealants, Caulks: Product Data and material safety data sheets (MSDS) for adhesives and sealants used on the project, indicating VOC content of each product used.

C. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1354
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00-2

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. For CALGreen 5.504.4.1, adhesives, sealants and caulks shall comply with local or regional air pollution control or air quality management district rules or SCAQMD Rule 1168 VOC limits, as shown in Tables 5.504.4.1 and 5.504.4.2 in the California Building Code.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or equal:

1. USG Corporation

2. American Gypsum.

3. CertainTeed Corp.

4. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.

5. National Gypsum Company.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1355
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00-3
B. Interior Gypsum Wall & Ceiling Board (9.05): USG SHEETROCK Mold Tough VHI FireCode X Core Panels, or Equal: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Meets ASTM C1629, level 3 (highest) for hard and soft-body impact or equal.

1. Locations: Facilities Building Storage Room interior ceiling.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch Type X fire resistance.

3. Long Edges: Tapered or USG SW tapered or Equal.

4. Mold Resistant.

5. Higher resistance to abrasion and impacts per ASTM C1629.

C. Exterior Eave Gypsum Ceiling / Soffit Board and top of bathroom walls (9.06): USG SHEETROCK Glass-Mat Mold Tough VHI FireCode X Panels, or Equal: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Locations: Facilities Building interior skylight wells, Restroom interior ceiling and Storage interior walls.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch Type X fire resistance.

3. Long Edges: Tapered or USG SW tapered or Equal.

4. Fiberglass faced to shed water, Mold Resistant.

5. Higher resistance to abrasion and impacts per ASTM C1629.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:
a. Corner Trim.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or equal:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1356
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00-4

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Mold-resistant tape.

2. Exterior Gypsum Board: 4” Mold-resistant tape.

C. Joint Compound for Interior/Exterior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing:
a. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, attach sheathing with #6 or larger screws w/ a minimum of 3 exposed threads on the back of connected part(s). Screws to comply with ASTM C 1002, with corrosion-resistance of more than 800 hours per ASTM B117 (Minimum). Where sheathing is being used to resist wind/seismic loads per AISI S400, #8 or larger screws are to be used.
b. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing with #6 or larger screws w/ a minimum of 3 exposed threads on the back of connected part(s). Screws to comply with ASTM C 954, with corrosion-resistance of more than 800 hours per ASTM B117 (Minimum). Where sheathing is being used to resist wind/seismic loads per AISI S400, #8 or larger screws are to be used.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1357
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00-5
E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or equal:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.
b. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1358
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00-6
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off soundflanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING GYPSUM BOARD
A. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

B. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with baselayer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1359
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00-7
vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Corner Trim: Use at all outside horizontal and vertical corners unless otherwise indicated.

2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners, only where indicated on plans.

3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

C. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply 4” joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.

3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.

4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 00 "Painting."

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1360
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00-8

5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 00 “Painting."
E. Restroom Ceiling and Exterior Office Entry Ceiling (GYP-2) Apply exterior primer, basecoat and paint finish suitable for exterior use, more intensive cleaning and high humidity. Finish with Anti-Graffiti coating, see Section 09 91 00 Painting and Section 09 96 23 GraffitiResistant Coatings.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 09 29 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1361
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set TILING
09 30 00-1
SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Ceramic tile at Restroom Building interior and entry exterior walls.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

2. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim - for exposed sheet metal flashing

3. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants

4. Section 09 28 13 - Cementitious Backing Boards

5. Section 09 34 13 - Adhered Porcelain Tile Cladding

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data in accordance with Division 1 General Conditions on all materials and accessories.

1. Product Data for CALGreen 5.504.4.1 Adhesives, Sealants, Caulks: Product Data and material safety data sheets (MSDS) for adhesives and sealants used on the project, indicating VOC content of each product used.

2. Submit data per CALGreen 5.504.4.1 for waterproofing membranes and adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.

3. Submit data per CALGreen 5.504.4.1 for tile setting adhesives and grout, including printed statement of VOC content.

B. Samples:

1. Samples of tile type/style/finish/size/color for Initial Selection: Submit four (4) tile samples for each tile type (restroom entry and restroom interior) from specified types for selection by Architect.

2. Samples for Final Verification: After colors have been selected, submit three sample tile panels for each type, pattern, and color of tile selected. For 4-1/4-inch or larger tiles, submit a minimum of four tiles per panel; for ceramic mosaic tiles, submit tile panel a minimum of 8 inches square. Adhere tiles to hardboard or plywood panel, with the specified grout color filled into joints.

3. Grout: Submit grout color samples for selection by Architect.

C. Qualification Data: Submit for installer.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1362
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set TILING
09 30 00-2
manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, supply sources, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and source of aggregates.

1. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockups constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect approves such deviations in writing.

C. Material Test Reports:

1. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer indicating that sealants will not stain or damage tile. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced, who has completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that required for this Project, and with a record of successful performance.

B. Standards:

1. Tile: Certified by Tile Council of North America (TCNA) to meet or exceed ANSI A137.1 Standard Grade requirements.

2. Slip Resistance: Tile static coefficient of friction, wet or dry, to be a minimum of 0.6 for walking surfaces and a minimum of 0.8 for ramps, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1028.

3. Tile Setting Adhesive and Grout: Meet South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168.

4. Installation Standard: Comply with the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" published by TCA for installation methods specified, unless otherwise shown or specified.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for typical exterior and interior wall in sizes approximately 30 inches long by 30 inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.
a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup.

2. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1363
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set TILING
09 30 00-3
A. Submit to the City upon completion of work extra tiles, and trim for future repair and maintenance work. Submit not less than 2 percent additional tiles and ten trim pieces for each type and color installed. Package the extra materials in a cardboard box suitable for storage.

Clearly label and identify the contents in the box.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Small format Ceramic Tile at Restroom Interior and Exterior:

1. Manufacturer: Emser Tile, DalTile, FireClay, Porcelanosa, or Other approved by Owner.

2. Wall Tile: 3 x 12 inch or 2 x 10 inch ceramic tiles, glazed finish; colors to be selected by Architect, including but not limited to the following alternates:

ALT 1: Daltile Remedy Hydro
ALT 2: Daltile Remedy Vitality
ALT 3: Daltile Remedy Herbal
ALT 4: Emser Inhale
ALT 4: Daltile Mesmerist Mystique
ALT 5: Daltile Mesmerist Whimsy
ALT 6: Emser Raku Blue
ALT 7: Emser Raku Ocean
ALT 8: Daltile Artcrafted Tide
ALT 9: Daltile Artcrafted Aloe

B. Trim: Matching stops, returns, surface bullnoses, trimmers, and other shapes required to produce a complete and finish installation. Trim shall match the tile in size, color, and finish, unless otherwise shown or specified.

C. Grout:

1. Manufacturer: Custom Building Products, Bostik Hydroment, Mapei, or equal.

2. Wall Grout: ANSI A118.6 latex portland cement grout, unsanded. a. Color: To be selected by Architect.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Mortar Bed Mix: ANSI A108.1; bond coat consisting of portland cement paste on a mortar bed that is still workable, or latex portland cement mortar on a cured bed.

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I

2. Sand: ASTM C144.

3. Lime: ASTM C206.

B. Metal Lath: ASTM C847, except steel need not be copper bearing and may be painted.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1364
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set TILING
09 30 00-4
C. Thinset Mortar at Wall Tile: ANSI A118.4 - Latex portland cement mortar, thinset.

D. Tile Backerboard: Refer to Section 09 28 13 - Cementitious Backer Boards.

E. Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane: Laticrete “Hydro Ban” Liquid Applied Waterproofing Membrane. See Section 0934 13 Adhered Porcelain Tile Cladding for additional information.

F. Edge Protection and Divider Strips: Stainless steel, height to align with tile thickness, 1/8-inch wide top edge, bottom edge designed for anchorage in tile setting bed; Schluter Systems Inc., Or Equal. Architect to select material finish from manufacturer’s standards.

1. Schluter – SCHIENE
a. Description: L-shaped profile with 1/8” (3.2 mm) top section and vertical wall section that together form the visible surface, integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer.
b. Anchoring Leg: provide with straight anchoring leg
c. Material and Finish: EV4A – Stainless Steel Type 316 L – V4A. d. Height: as required.

F. Joint Sealants: Mildew-resistant silicone type at bathrooms, polyurethane self-leveling type at floors, as specified in Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants.

G. Grout Sealer: Low VOC sealer, specifically designed for sealing tile grout joints; Miracle Sealants Company "511 H2O Plus - Water Base Penetrating Sealer", or equal.

2.3 TILE CLEANERS
A. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from tile surfaces without discoloring or damaging tile surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and tile producer.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, Or Equal:
a. Prosoco, Inc.

2.4 TILE SEALER
A. Product: Miracle Sealants Co. “511 Impregnator”, or equal. Natural look penetrating sealer.

2.5 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches required consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1365
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set TILING
09 30 00-5
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive tile, with Installer present, to determine that they are satisfactory and in compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of tile.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Tile Backerboard:

1. Install in accordance with ANSI A108.11.

2. Fasten to studs with corrosion-resistant fasteners, spaced at maximum 8 inches on center. At horizontal and vertical joints, corners of panels, and junctions with dissimilar materials, provide gap of 1/8-inch to 3/16-inch, and completely fill with dry-set or portland cement mortar.

3. Cover joints and corners with 2-inch wide fiberglass mesh tape embedded in skim coat of portland cement mortar.

B. Prior to setting tile, apply sealant around all pipes and conduits penetrating tile substrate surfaces using specified sealant.

C. Clean dirty or stained tile surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean tile by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.

3.3 INSTALLATION - TILE
A. Installation Methods: Comply with the following TCNA installation methods:

1. Thinset Walls on Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): W202

2. Interior Thinset Walls on Backerboard: W243; ANSI A108.5, thinset method, latex portland-cement mortar bond coat. See Section 09 28 13 Cementitious Backer Boards.

3. Exterior Thinset Walls on Backerboard: W244; ANSI A108.5, thinset method, latex portland-cement mortar bond coat. See Section 09 28 13 Cementitious Backer Boards.

4. Expansion Joints: EJ171.

B. General: Do not use units with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects which could be visible in the finished work.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1366
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set TILING
09 30 00-6
C. Contiguous Work: Provide drain and cleanout openings as shown. Close up openings in tile work after other work is in place. Use materials and set to match surrounding tile.

D. Preparation of Substrate: Clean substrate to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.

E. Installing Tile:

1. Lay out tile units with fields centered; avoid use of units less than one-half size. Unless otherwise noted, align units square, parallel, and straight. Joint widths shall be the same in each area, approximately 1/16-inch, unless otherwise shown or specified.

2. When cutting is required, grind edges smooth. Accurately cut units around work of other trades so that edges of tile will be completely covered; terminate tile at centerlines of doors, unless otherwise shown or specified.

3. Firmly embed units in setting material and bring finished surfaces to true planes. Make inside corners square and outside corners bullnose.

4. Tiles exhibit a range of variation with different graphics. Pull from multiple boxes during installation and rotate pieces per manufacturer’s recommendation to achieve proper final blend.

F. Grouting:

1. Grout joints in accordance with ANSI A108.10.

2. Perform grouting as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into joints, strike flush, and tool slightly concave. Wet joint surfaces, if dry, prior to grouting.

3. Provide means to prevent grout staining the exposed face of tile and pavers.

G. Sealant: Seal intersection of interior wall tile and dissimilar materials with silicone sealant.

Clean all joints free of loose mortar, dirt, and debris. Neatly tool all sealants.

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints in width to match grout-joint width, and seal with polyurethane sealant in color to match grout. Provide expansion joint between intersection of wall and at construction pour joints.

3.4 CLEAN, CURE AND PROTECT
A. Clean tile and adjacent surfaces of adhesive and grout as work progresses. Upon completion, thoroughly clean tile surfaces in manner not to affect glazing.

B. Curing: Provide proper temperature and humidity conditions for curing the work. Damp-cure cement grouts for not less than 72 hours. Add dampness as required, and cover with nonstaining membrane.

C. Grout Joints: Seal tile joints with grout sealer in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

D. Protect tile work from damage until final acceptance of entire Project.

END OF SECTION 09 30 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1367
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-1
SECTION 09 34 13 - ADHERED PORCELAIN TILE CLADDING
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope of work - Provide porcelain tile, tile installation materials and accessories as indicated on drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for complete and proper installation.

B. Location – Facilities Building exterior façade.

C. Related Documents - provisions within General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Gauged porcelain tile
B. Installation Products; adhesives, mortars, metal lath, grouts and sealants C. Waterproofing membranes (WPM) for porcelain tile work D. Anti-fracture membranes for porcelain tile work
E. Thresholds, trim, cementitious backer units and other accessories specified herein.

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Environmental Performance Criteria: The following criteria are required for products included in this section.

Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements:

1. Adhesive products shall comply with the VOC limits of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule (SCAQMD) #1168 and Bay Area Air Quality Management District (BAAQMD) Reg. 8, Rule 51.

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04 22 00 Concrete Masonry Unit
B. Section 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing (for framing behind sheathing) C. Section 07 25 00 Weather Barriers (for Water Resistant Barrier (WRB) behind façade system)
D. Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants
E. Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim (for copings, flashings, and other sheet metal work not part of facade assemblies)
F. Section 09 28 13 - Cementitious Backer Boards. (for material behind framed facade system)
G. Section 09 30 00 Tiling (for reference info. on adjacent ceramic tile work)

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1368
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-2

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A137.1 American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A137.3 American National Standard Specifications for Gauged Porcelain Tiles and Gauged Porcelain Tile Panels/Slabs D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A108.01 - A108.17 American National Standard Specifications for The Installation of Ceramic Tile E. ANSI A118.10, Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membrane for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installations.

F. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A118.1 - A118.15 American National Standard Specifications for The Installation of Ceramic Tile G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A108.19 American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Gauged Porcelain Tiles and Gauged Porcelain Tile Panels/Slabs
H. ANSI A108.20, American National Standard Specifications for Exterior Installation of Vertical and Overhead Gauged Porcelain Tiles and Gauged Porcelain Tile Panels/Slabs by the Thin-Bed Method Bonded with Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar - 2020.

I. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C36 Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.

J. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens).

K. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

L. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

M. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
N. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C531 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacing’s and Polymer Concretes
O. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C627 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems Using the Robinson-Type Floor Tester
P. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C794 Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants
Q. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM-C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board
R. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath
S. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
T. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D1248 Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substances by Joint Sealants
U. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by The Plastic Sheet Method

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1369
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-3
V. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D4716 Standard Test Method for Determining the (In Plane) Flow Rate Per Unit Width and Hydraulic Transmissivity of a Geo-synthetic Using a Constant Head
W. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 13007 Standards for Grouts and Adhesives
X. Materials And Methods Standards Association (MMSA) Bulletins 1-16 Y. Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (ML/SFA) 540 Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual
Z. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) Product Technical Information and ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. Report ER-4943P
AA. Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Exterior installations of gauged porcelain tiles over concrete using latex Portland cement mortar and latex Portland cement grout.

B. Exterior installations of gauged porcelain tiles over exterior gypsum board using latex Portland cement mortar and cement grout.

C. Seismic Clips may be required, as shown in details and called out in these specifications, pending local building official review of “adhered veneer” exterior façade installations as tile sizes:

1. Exceed 24 inches (600 mm) in any face dimension.

2. Exceed 3 square feet (0.27 square meters) in total facial area.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals: follow procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions Section 4.19.

1.8 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Product Data: For each variety of tile, tile accessory, and manufactured product.

1. Material Safety Data Sheets for all applicable products.

2. At project completion, Submit Product Cut Sheets with Contractor or Subcontractor’s stamp, as confirmation that submitted products were installed on Project.

B. CALGreen Submittals: Submit product data in accordance with Division 1.

1. Product Data for CALGreen 5.504.4.1 Adhesives, Sealants, Caulks: Product Data and material safety data sheets (MSDS) for adhesives and sealants used on the project, indicating VOC content of each product used.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings of Bonded façade system and Porcelanosa tile layout and exposed seismic clip attachment system details and locations for Engineer’s review and approval prior to installation. (Note: final seismic clip design will require local building official review).

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1370
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-4
D. Submit sample of installation system demonstrating compatibility/functional relationships between adhesives, mortars, grouts and other components under provision of Division 1. Submit proof from tile or Ceramic tile manufacturer or supplier verifying suitability of thin porcelain tiles for specific application and use; including dimensional stability, water absorption, resistance to thermal cycling, and other characteristics that the project may require. These characteristics must be reviewed and approved by the project design professional(s).

E. Samples of tile type/style/finish/size/color for Initial Selection:

1. Grout: Submit grout color samples from manufacturer’s full range for selection by Architect.

2. Tile: Submit available tile color samples from specified types for selection by Architect. After colors have been selected, submit one sample tile panel for each type, pattern, and color of tile selected (four (4) maximum alternatives).

Submit a minimum of three tiles per panel. Adhere tiles to hardboard or plywood panel, with the specified grout color filled into joints.

F. Sample for Final Verification:

1. Grout: For color of grout selected. Label Sample to indicate types and amounts of pigments used.

2. Tile. Provide one Sample panel. Submit a minimum of three tiles per panel.

Adhere tiles to hardboard or plywood panel, with the specified grout color filled into joints. Label Sample to indicate tile, finish and sealer used.

1.9 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Submit manufacturers' installation instructions under provisions of Division 1.

C. Submit manufacturer's certification under provisions of Section 1 that the materials supplied conform to ANSI A137.1 for ceramic tile.

D. Submit proof of warranty.

E. Submit Health Product Declarations (HPD) for each tile installation material.

F. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, supply sources, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and source of aggregates.

1. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockups constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect approves such deviations in writing.

G. Material Test Reports:

1. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer indicating that sealants will not stain or damage tile. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

H. Submit list from manufacturer of installation system/adhesive/mortar/grout identifying

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1371
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-5
a minimum of three (3) similar projects, each with a minimum of ten (10) years’ service.

I. For alternate materials, at least thirty (30) days before bid date submit independent laboratory test results confirming compliance with specifications listed in Part 2 - Products.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
NOTES TO CONTRACTOR:

1. It is strongly recommended to use installers who have demonstrated their commitment to their craft and taken the time to stay current with the latest materials and methods. Requiring references and a portfolio along with a bid or estimate is a good way to ensure the installer has successfully completed work of similar size, scope, and complexity.

2. Exterior facades and mortar beds require specific specialty skills. Matching installer ability to the project at hand requires close evaluation of their experience, training, state licensing (where applicable), and certifications/credentials (where applicable).

The Ceramic Tile Education Foundation (CTEF) provides a Contractor Questionnaire that can be used to aid in evaluating and comparing contractors (www.tilecareer.com).

3. Various programs administered by associations, non-profit educational organizations, unions, and private companies serve the tile industry by providing education, hands-on training, and evaluation of the skills and competency of installers and contractors. It is important to distinguish between the many programs available:
 Hands-on training
 Evaluation/certification of installation skills
 On-line training
 On-line knowledge evaluation (without a hands-on component) As with all programs, the rigor and credibility of the program must also be considered.

The following non-profit programs are well-established and recognized by the Tile Council of North America’s (TCNA) Handbook Committee (listed alphabetically):

Ceramic Tile Education Foundation (CTEF) Certified Tile Installer Program: CTEF tests hands-on installation skills and knowledge. Installers must achieve the minimum required score on both tests to earn the “CTEF Certified Installer” designation.

Contractors that employ CTEF Certified Installers are listed in the CTEF Contractor Directory, found in this Handbook and on the CTEF website. See www.tilecareer.org for more information.

International Masonry Institute (IMI) Contractor College Program: IMI conducts professional and technical courses for union masonry and tile contractors, which lead to certification in installation and project supervision. See www.imiweb.org for more information.

Journeyman Tile Layer Apprenticeship Programs: Installers recognized by the U.S.

Department of Labor (DOL) as Journeyman Tile Layers are required to fulfill and document several years of training and on-the-job experience as apprentices to become

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1372
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-6
Journeymen. The majority of these setters earn their Journeyman status through unionaffiliated training programs, although some non-union tile contractors administer their own DOL-recognized apprenticeship programs and employ journeyman tile layers.

Contractors that employ union Journeyman Tile Setters can be found through the union locals that list their signatory contractors, primarily the Bricklayer and Allied Craftworkers (BAC) and the United Brotherhood of Carpenters (UBC). See www.bacweb.org and www.carpenters.org for more information.

National Tile Contractors Association (NTCA) Five Star Contractor Program: NTCA is a tile contractors association, with membership open to all tile contractors. Their Five Star program is a peer review program to recognize NTCA members who have demonstrated a track record of providing successful installations. Earning the Five Star designation requires recommendations from customers, suppliers, and peers as well as participation in continuing education, training, and safety programs. See www.tile-assn.com for more information.

Tile Contractors’ Association of America (TCAA) Trowel of Excellence Program: TCAA is a contractor’s association for BAC signatory contractors. Its Trowel of Excellence program is a peer review program to recognize TCAA members who have demonstrated a track record of providing successful installations. Earning the Trowel of Excellence designation requires letters of reference, submittal of a detailed project description and photos, employee participation in educational programming, and proof of financial responsibility. See www.tcaainc.org for more information.

A. Tile Manufacturer (single source responsibility): Company specializing in large, thin porcelain tiles with three (3) years minimum experience. Obtain tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

B. Installation System Manufacturer (single source responsibility): Company specializing in adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials with ten (10) years minimum experience and ISO 9001 certification. Obtain installation materials from single source manufacturer to ensure consistent quality and full compatibility.

C. Submit laboratory confirmation of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials:

1. Identify proper usage of specified materials using positive analytical method.

2. Identify compatibility of specified materials using positive analytical method.

3. Identify proper color matching of specified materials using a positive analytical method.

D. Installer qualifications: company specializing in installation of large, thin porcelain tiles with five (5) years documented experience with installations of similar scope, materials and design.

1.11 MOCK-UPS
A. Provide mock-up of each type/style/finish/size/color of thin porcelain tiles, along with respective installation adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials, under provisions of Section 1.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 60 inches long by

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1373
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-7
60 inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.
a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup. b. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12- inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit tile above half of flashing).

2. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.12 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
Pre-installation conference: At least three weeks prior to commencing the work attend a meeting at the jobsite to discuss conformance with requirements of specification and job site conditions. Representatives of the owner, architect, general contractor, tile subcontractor, Tile Manufacturer, Installation System Manufacturer and any other parties who are involved in the scope of this installation must attend the meeting.

1.13 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
Preconstruction Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for compatibility and adhesion testing according to sealant manufacturer's standard testing methods and Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," Samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Acceptance at Site: deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels, including grade seal, intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Store large, thin porcelain tiles and installation system materials in a dry location; handle in a manner to prevent chipping, breakage, and contamination.

C. Thin porcelain tiles are to be stored both upright and horizontal. If tiles are placed on top of each other, ensure that each tile is clean and that the surface that the slabs are resting on is flat. If tiles are stored in their vertical position, rest them on their long side.

This side must be protected by wood, cardboard, polystyrene or rubber cement.

D. To correctly lift and handle pallets / crates of large porcelain slabs using a forklift, position the forks at a distance of minimum 3.3 feet (1 meter) from each other, perpendicular to the long side of the pallet and at the center of the pallet. If necessary, to move pallets of large porcelain slabs, by the pallet short side, forks must be at least as long as the longest panel edge.

E. Protect latex additives, organic adhesives, epoxy adhesives and sealants from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; store at room temperature when possible.

F. Store Portland cement mortars and grouts in a dry location.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1374
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-8

1.15 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Provide ventilation and protection of environment as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Prevent carbon dioxide damage to thin porcelain tiles, as well as adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials, by venting temporary heaters to the exterior.

C. Maintain ambient temperatures not less than 50ºF (10ºC) or more than 100ºF (38ºC) during installation and for a minimum of seven (7) days after completion. Setting of portland cement is retarded by low temperatures. Protect work for extended period of time and from damage by other trades. Protect Portland cement based mortars and grouts from direct sunlight, radiant heat, forced ventilation (heat & cold) and drafts until cured to prevent premature evaporation of moisture. Epoxy mortars and grouts require surface temperatures between 60ºF (16ºC) and 90ºF (32ºC) at time of installation. It is the General Contractor’s responsibility to maintain temperature control.

D. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining tile face.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter using coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed tile.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.16 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of tile work with related work.

B. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of flashing and similar items to be built into tile work.

C. Proceed with tile work only after curbs, vents, drains, piping, and other projections through substrate have been installed and when substrate construction and framing of openings have been completed.

1.17 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor warrants the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract Documents and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 25 years. The manufacturer of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials shall provide a written twenty-five (25) year warranty, which covers materials and labor - reference LATICRETE Warranty Data Sheet 025.0 for complete details and requirements.

B. For exterior facades over steel or wood framing, the manufacturer of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials shall provide a written fifteen (15) year warranty, which covers materials and labor - reference LATICRETE Warranty Data Sheet 230.15 for complete details and requirements.

1.18 MAINTENANCE
Submit maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. Include cleaning methods, cleaning solutions recommended, stain removal methods, as well as polishes and waxes recommended.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1375
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-9

1.19 EXTRA MATERIALS STOCK
Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the Owner 2% minimum additional tile and trim shape of each type, color, pattern and size used in the Work, as well as extra stock of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials for the Owner's use in replacement and maintenance. Extra stock is to be from the same production run or batch as original tile and installation materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE MANUFACTURERS
A. Exterior Wall Façade System: Obtain Exterior Wall Façade System - tile, mortar, grout, and anchors from a manufacturer with the resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance, physical properties and performance in compliance with ANSI A137.3.

B. Subject to compliance with paragraphs 1.12 and performance requirements, provide products from a single source by the following manufacturers: Porcelanosa Grupo Butech, Laticrete International, Inc.

2.2 WALL TILE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer: Emser Tile, Daltile, Porcelanosa, or Other approved by Owner B. Tile Series: As selected from samples as described below.

1. Tile Thickness: 13/32 inches (nominal 10 mm) with anti-fragmentation mesh.

2. Tile Weight: 5.15 lbs/sq-ft, 25.20 kg/sq-m.

3. Primary Tile Sizes: Cut tiles to sizes indicated below as required. a. As indicated on the Drawings.
b. 24 x 6 inches
c. 24 x 12 inches
d. 24 by 18 inches

4. Finish: As selected from manufacturer’s full range.

5. Samples: Contractor shall provide a range of six (6) tile samples for approval by Owner and Architect. Tiles shall include, but not be limited to, from a selection of available types:
a. ALT 1 Emser Milestone Moon
b. ALT 2 Emser Milestone Gray
c. ALT 3 Daltile Delegate Light Grey Matte
d. ALT 4 Daltile Diplomacy Light Grey
e. ALT 5 Daltile Diplomacy Medium Grey
f. ALT 6. Emser Newport Ferry
g. ALT 7 Daltile Ambassador Jet Setter Dusk

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1376
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-10

2.3 ADHESIVE VENEER MORTAR, SEISMIC ATTACHMENT CLIPS AND GROUT Provide a high-performance thin set cement-base adhesive and mortar from Laticrete International, Inc. (See Section 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES – LARGE THIN PORCELAIN TILE) (both Alternatives have been specified here) that is warrantied and compatible with the specified exterior Gauged Porcelain Tile Panels/Slabs (GPTP) by Porcelanosa and the Laticrete Hydro Ban waterproofing membrane. Provide a system that allows for a Water-Resistant Barrier and/or Waterproofing and is bonded to concrete masonry unit (CMU) and exterior gypsum sheathing substrate with a thin bed method in compliance with ANSI A108.20. Provide the following:

1. Adhesive: Butech Porcelanosa Grupo “super-flex S2” for exterior large format, thin porcelain tiles, application shall confirm to manufacturer’s recommendations.

Technical Data Sheet:
https://www.butech.net/en/products/Adhesivos-cementosos/super-flex-s2

2. Tile Anchors / Seismic Clips: Provide stainless steel concealed seismic clips by Butech / Porcelanosa in accordance with Porcelanosa’s bonded wall/façade construction attachment clip details if required by the local building official and as approved by the project Engineer. Provide exposed seismic clips to fasten large tile panels/slabs as required.

Technical Data Sheet (Page 178 - 183):
https://www.butech.net/download/FACHADAS%202016%20EN.pdf#page =86

3. Grout: Butech Porcelanosa Grupo “epotech aqua”, Two-component colored epoxy putty for joints up to 10 mm wide in porcelain tile outdoor wall facades.

Airtight installation joint, no water absorption, excellent adhesion and mechanical resistance
Technical Data Sheet:
https://www.butech.net/en/products/material-de-rejuntadoepoxidico/epotech-aqua

2.4 PORCELAIN TILE WATERPROOFING MATERIALS MANUFACTURER A. LATICRETE International, Inc., 1 Laticrete Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423 USA Phone 800-243-4788, (203) 393-0010 [email protected], www.laticrete.com; www.laticrete.com/green
B. Provide liquid applied waterproofing membrane on all exterior surfaces to receive porcelain tile, as well as tops of all CMU walls. Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membrane for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile Installations; compliant with ANSI A118.10: Provide the following, or equal: Laticrete “Hydro Ban.” Install per manufacturer’s recommendations for Laticrete Hydro Ban.

2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES – LARGE THIN PORCELAIN TILE A. Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane to be thin, cold applied, single component liquid and load bearing and UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant. Reinforcing fabric to be non-woven rot-proof specifically intended for waterproofing membrane. Waterproofing

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1377
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-11
Membrane to be non-toxic, non-flammable, and non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured. It shall be certified by IAPMO and ICC approved as a shower pan liner and shall also meet the following physical requirements:

1. Hydrostatic Test (ASTM D4068): Pass

2. Elongation @ break (ASTM D751): 20-30%

3. System Crack Resistance (ANSI A118.12): Pass (High)

4. 7 day Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.10): 265 psi (1.8 MPa)

5. 7 day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10) 200 psi (1.4 MPa)

6. 28 Day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.4): 214 psi (1.48 – 2.4 MPa)

7. Service Rating (TCNA/ASTM C627): Extra Heavy

8. Total VOC Content: ≤0.22 mg/m3
(Basis of Design: LATICRETE® HYDRO BAN®**)
B. Epoxy Waterproofing Membrane to be 3 component epoxy, trowel applied specifically designed to be used under Ceramic tile, stone or brick and requires only 24 hours prior to flood testing:

1. Breaking Strength (ANSI A118.10): 450-530 psi (3.1-3.6 MPa)

2. Waterproofness (ANSI A118.10): No Water penetration

3. 7 day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): 110-150 psi (0.8-1 MPa)

4. 28 Day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): 90-120 psi (0.6–0.83 MPa)

5. 12 Week Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): 110-130 psi (0.8-0.9 MPa)

6. Total VOC Content: <3.4 g/L
(Basis of Design: LATAPOXY® Waterproof Flashing Mortar)

C. Waterproofing Sheet Membrane to be thin, durable polyethylene core with a fused nonwoven polypropylene exterior surface, IAPMO approved as shower pan liner, and allow for use of either polymer modified or un-modified tile mortars, depending upon substrate and type of tile used.

1. Waterproofness (ASTM D4068): Pass

2. 7 day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): ≥ 170 psi

3. 7-Day Water Immersion Shear Strength (ASTM C482-09): ≥ 100 psi

4. Service Rating (TCNA ASTM C627): Extra Heavy
(Basis of Design: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane)

2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS – LARGE THIN PORCELAIN TILE
A. Moisture Vapor Reduction to be epoxy based and UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant as well as meet the following physical requirements:

1. Shear Bond to Concrete (ANSI A118.12-5.1.5): >285 psi (2.0 MPa)

2. Alkalinity Resistance (ASTM C267): Pass

3. Permeability (ASTM F1869): 9.7 lbs/1,000ft2/24 hours down to 0.2 lbs/1,000 ft2/24hours (248 µg/s•m2
down to 11 µg/s•m2)

4. Total VOC Content: ≤0.22 mg/m3
(Basis of Design: LATICRETE® NXT™ Vapor Reduction Coating**)

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1378
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-12
B. Latex Portland Cement Mortar for thick beds, screeds, leveling beds and scratch/plaster coats to be weather, frost, shock resistant, UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant, and meet the following physical requirements:

1. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.4 Modified): >4,000 psi (27.6 MPa)

2. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.6): ≤ 5%

3. Service Rating (TCA/ASTM C627): Extra Heavy

4. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0

5. Total VOC Content: ≤0.22 mg/m3
(Basis of Design: LATICRETE 3701 Fortified Mortar**)
C. Self-Leveling Underlayment shall be mixed with water to produce a pumpable, fast setting, free flowing cementitious underlayment which can be poured from 1/8 in. to 1- 1/4 in. (3 to 32mm) thick in one pour and GREENGUARD Gold compliant.

1. 28 Day Compressive Strength (ASTM C1708.): >4000 psi (27.6 MPa)

2. Tensile Bond Strength (ASTM C1583): >500 psi (3.5 MPa)

3. Time To Foot Traffic: 1 – 4 Hours

4. Total VOC Content: < 0.05 mg/m3
(Basis of Design: LATICRETE NXT Level Plus and NXT Primer) D. Epoxy Adhesive to be chemical resistant 100% solids epoxy with high temperature resistance, GREENGUARD Gold compliant, conform to ISO R2, and meet the following minimum physical requirements:

1. Compressive strength (ANSI A118.3): >5000 psi (34.4 MPa)

2. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3): >1250 psi (8.6 MPa)

3. Thermal Shock Resistance (ANSI A118.3): >600 psi (4.1 MPa)

4. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.3): >1400 psi (9.6 MPa)

5. Shrinkage (ANSI A118.3): 0 – 0.1%

6. Total VOC Content: ≤0.22 mg/m3

7. ISO 13007 Classification: R2

8. Cured Epoxy Adhesive to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea, coffee, milk, soda, beer, wine, bleach (5% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil, detergents, brine, sugar, cosmetics and blood, as well as chemically resistant to dilute food acids, dilute alkalis, gasoline, turpentine and mineral spirits. (Basis of Design: LATAPOXY 300 Adhesive**)
E. Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Thin Bed Mortar for thin set and slurry bond coats to be weather, frost, shock resistant, non-flammable, GREENGUARD Gold compliant, conform to ISO C2TES2,and meet the following physical requirements:

1. 28 Day Porcelain Tile Shear Strength (ANSI A118.15): >450 psi (3.1 MPa)

2. 28 Day Dry Cure / 20 Cycle Freeze-Thaw Porcelain Tile Shear Strength (ANSI A118.15): ≥ 250 psi (1.7 MPa)

3. 7 Day Cure / 7 Day Water Immersion (ANSI A118.15): >280 psi (1.9 MPa)

4. Extended Open Time (ANSI A118.15): > 100 psi (0.7 MPa)

5. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0

6. Total VOC Content: ≤0.22 mg/m3
(Basis of Design: LATICRETE® 254 Platinum**)

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1379
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-13
F. Rapid-Setting Modified Dry-Set Cement Thin Bed Mortar to be weather, frost, shock resistant, non-flammable, conform to EN12004:2007 + A1:2012 for Class C2FTS2 adhesive, and meet the following physical requirements:

1. 28 Day Porcelain Tile Shear Strength (ANSI A118.4): >400 psi (2.8MPa)

2. 7 Day Cure / 7 Day Water Immersion (ANSI A118.4): >200 psi (1.4 MPa)

3. Shear Bond / Quarry Tile to Plywood (ANSI A118.11): >190 psi (1.3 MPa)

4. Open Time (ANSI A118.4): ≥ 30 minutes
(Basis of Design: LATICRETE 254R Platinum Rapid)
G. Epoxy Grout (Commercial/Residential) shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, nonhazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured, UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant, and shall meet the following physical requirements:

1. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.3): 3,800 psi (26.2 MPa)

2. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3): 1,100 psi (7.6 MPa)

3. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.3): 1,100 psi (7.6 MPa)

4. Thermal Shock (ANSI A118.3): >800 psi (5.5 MPa)

5. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.3): <0.05%

6. Vertical Joint Sag (ANSI A118.3): Pass

7. Total VOC Content: ≤0.22 mg/m3

8. Cured Epoxy Grout to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea, coffee, milk, soda, beer, wine, bleach (5% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil, brine, sugar, cosmetics, and blood, as well as chemically resistant to dilute acids and dilute alkalis.
(Basis of Design: LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK® PRO Premium Grout**) H. Latex Portland Cement Grout to be weather, frost and shock resistant, conform to ISO 13007 requirements for CG2WAF, UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant, as well as meet the following physical requirements:

1. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.7): 3,500 psi (24.1 MPa)

2. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.7): 510 psi (3.5 MPa)

3. Flexural Strength (ANSI A118.7): 1,250 psi (8.6 MPa)

4. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.7): < 5%

5. Linear Shrinkage (ANSI A118.7): < 0.5 %

6. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0

7. Total VOC Content: ≤0.22 mg/m3
(Basis of Design: LATICRETE PERMACOLOR® Select**)
I. Expansion and Control Joint Sealant to be a one component, neutral cure, exterior grade silicone sealant and meet the following requirements:

1. Tensile Strength (ASTM C794): 280 psi (1.9 MPa)

2. Hardness (ASTM D751; Shore A): 25 (colored sealant) /15 (clear sealant)

3. Weather Resistance (QUV Weather-ometer): 10,000 hours (no change) (Basis of Design: LATICRETE LATASIL™ and LATASIL 9118 Primer) ** UL GREENGUARD Certified for Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG 2818) and UL GREENGUARD Gold Certified for Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG UL 2818)

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1380
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-14

2.7 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches required consistency.

Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.

C. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

2.9 TILE METAL TRIM PIECE
A. Edge Protection and Divider Strips: Stainless steel, height to align with tile thickness, 1/8-inch wide top edge, bottom edge designed for anchorage in tile setting bed; Schluter Systems Inc., Or Equal. Architect to select material finish from manufacturer’s standards.

1. Schluter – SCHIENE
a. Description: L-shaped profile with 1/8” (3.2 mm) top section and vertical wall section that together form the visible surface, integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer. b. Anchoring Leg: provide with straight anchoring leg
c. Material and Finish: EV4A – Stainless Steel Type 316 L – V4A. d. Height: as required.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS TILE ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.

2.11 TILE CLEANERS
A. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and cement stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from tile surfaces without discoloring or damaging tile surfaces; expressly approved for

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1381
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-15
intended use by cleaner manufacturer and tile producer.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, Or Equal:
a. Porcelanosa: Acid Net OR EQUAL (cement and plaster removal – NOT epoxy grout),
(Porce-clean: neutral pH cleaner), and (Basic Gel : deep cleaning)

2.12 TILE SEALER
A. Product: Miracle Sealants Co. “511 Impregnator”, Or Equal. Natural look penetrating sealer.

B. Anti-Graffiti Coating – see Section 09 96 23 Anti-Graffiti Coating System. Contractor shall confirm with final selected tile manufacturer, Owner and Architect prior to application.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS FOR GAUGED PORCELAIN PANELS
A. All installation procedures and execution shall be in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations and meet the installation standard requirements of ANSI A137.3 and ANSI A108.20.

3.2 SUBSTRATE EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces to be covered with large, thin porcelain tile installations:

1. Sound, rigid and conform to good design/engineering practices.

2. Systems, including the framing system and panels, over which thin porcelain tiles will be installed shall be in conformance with the International Residential Code (IRC) for residential applications, the International Building Code (IBC) for commercial applications, or applicable building codes.

3. Clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, sealers, curing compounds, laitance, efflorescence, form oil, loose plaster, paint, and scale.

4. For thin-bed porcelain tile installations when a cementitious bonding material will be used: maximum allowable variation in the tile substrate is 1/8” in 10’ (3mm in 3m) from the required plane, with no more than 1/16” variation in 24” (1.5mm variation in 600mm) when measured from the high points in the surface. For modular substrate units, such as adjacent concrete masonry units, adjacent edges cannot exceed 1/32” (0.8mm) difference in height.

5. To fully evacuate water, shower pan membranes and bonded waterproofing membranes in wet areas must slope to and connect with a drain. Plumbing code typically requires membranes to be sloped a minimum of ¼” per ft. (6mm per 300mm) and extend at least 3” (75mm) above the height of the curb or threshold.

Account for the perimeter floor height required to form adequate slopes. Membranes must be installed over the other horizontal surfaces in wet areas subject to deterioration, like shower seats. They must be sloped and configured so as to direct

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1382
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-16
water to the membrane connected to the drain. The weep holes of clamping ring drains enable water to pass from the membrane into the plumbing system. Crushed Ceramic tile or stone, or other positive weep protectors, placed around/over weep holes help prevent their blockage. To form a watertight seal, membranes must have adequate contact with the clamping ring of the drain or with the bonding area of an integrated bonding flange. Dry as per American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D4263 “Standard Test for Determining Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method.”

6. Not leveled with gypsum or asphalt based compounds

7. For substrates scheduled to receive a waterproofing and/or crack isolation membrane, maximum amount of moisture in the concrete/mortar bed substrate should not exceed 5 lbs./1,000 ft2 / 24 hours (283 µg/s•m2) per ASTM F1869 or 75% relative humidity as measured with moisture probes per ASTM F2170. Consult with finish materials manufacturer to determine the maximum allowable moisture content for substrates under their finished material. Please refer to LATICRETE TDS 183 “Drying of Concrete” and TDS 166 “LATICRETE and Moisture Vapor Emission Rate, Relative Humidity and Moisture Testing of Concrete”, available at www.laticrete.com, for more information.

B. Concrete surfaces shall also be:

1. Cured a minimum of 28 days at 70°F (21°C), including an initial seven (7) day period of wet curing.

2. Wood float finished, or better, if the installation is to be done by the thin bed method.

C. Advise General Contractor and Architect of any surface or substrate conditions requiring correction before tile work commences. Beginning of work constitutes acceptance of substrate or surface conditions.

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Protect surrounding material surfaces and areas during installation of system.

B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation, so that they are free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, sealers, curing compounds, laitance, efflorescence, form oil, loose plaster, paint, and scale.

C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

D. For thin-bed porcelain tile installations when a cementitious bonding material will be used: maximum allowable variation in the tile substrate is 1/8” in 10’ (3mm in 3m) from the required plane, with no more than 1/16” variation in 24” (1.5mm variation in 600mm) when measured from the high points in the surface. For modular substrate units, such as adjacent concrete masonry units, adjacent edges cannot exceed 1/32” (0.8mm) difference in height.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1383
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-17
E. For substrates scheduled to receive a waterproofing and/or crack isolation membrane, maximum amount of moisture in the concrete/mortar bed substrate should not exceed 5 lbs./1,000 ft2 / 24 hours (283 µg/s•m2) per ASTM F1869 or 75% relative humidity as measured with moisture probes per ASTM F2170. Consult with finish materials manufacturer to determine the maximum allowable moisture content for substrates under their finished material.

F. Concrete surfaces shall also be:

1. Cured a minimum of 28 days at 70°F (21°C), including an initial seven (7) day period of wet curing.

G. Advise General Contractor and Architect of any surface or substrate conditions requiring correction before tile work commences. Beginning of work constitutes acceptance of substrate or surface conditions.

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION – FRAMED WALLS
A. CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT (CBU) OVER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

1. All designs, specifications and construction practices shall be in accordance with industry standards. See Sections 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing and Section 09 28 13 - Cementitious Backer Boards.

2. Prior to commencing work, installer must submit to Architect/Engineer for approval, shop drawings showing wall/façade construction and attachment details. All attachments must be designed to prevent transfer of building or structural movement to the wall/façade.

3. Construct all framing with galvanized or other rust resistant steel studs and channels, minimum requirements:

Stud Gauge: 16 gauge (1.5mm);
Stud Steel: conforming to ASTM A570 – latest edition with a minimum yield point of 50 ksi;
Stud Spacing: not to exceed 16” (400mm) on center;
Stud Width: 6” (150mm);
Horizontal Bridging: Not to exceed 4’ (1.2m) on center; 16 gauge CR channel typical or as specified by Engineer.

4. Studs shall be seated squarely in the channel tracks with the stud web and flange abutting the track web, plumbed or aligned, and securely attached to the flanges or web of both the upper and lower tracks by welding. Similarly connect horizontal bridging/purlins and anti-racking diagonal bracing as determined by Engineer. Grind welds smooth and paint with rust inhibiting paint. Finished frame and components must be properly aligned, square and true.

5. Provide adequate support of framing elements during erection to prevent racking, twisting or bowing. Lay out the CBU installation so all board edges are supported by metal framing (studs vertically and purlins horizontally). Cut/fit sheathing and add additional framing elements as required to support board edges. Stagger boards in courses to prevent continuous vertical joints and allow ⅛-3/16” (3-5mm) between sheets.

6. Fasten the CBU with 7/8” (22mm) minimum length, non-rusting, self-imbedding screws for metal studs (BUILDEX Catalog item 10-24 17/16 Wafer T3Z or equivalent). Fasten the boards every 6” (150mm) at the edges and every 8” (200mm) in the field. Stagger placement of screws at seams. Place screws no less than ⅜” (9mm), and no more than 1” (25mm), from board edges.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1384
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-18

7. Tape all the board joints with the alkali resistant 2” (50mm) wide reinforcing mesh provided by the sheathing manufacturer imbedded in the same mortar used to install the thin porcelain tiles.

8. Compliance with design criteria and state and local building codes must be approved and certified by a qualified Engineer. Use more stringent design criteria when necessary to comply with state and local building code stiffness requirements for thin veneers.

3.5 LEVEL COAT
A. Skim the surface of the Concrete /concrete masonry with cementitious skim coat or masonry veneer adhesive to level the surface to meet the tolerances of the porcelain tile before the application of the waterproofing membrane.

3.6 WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER (W.R.B.) or VAPOR BARRIER A. Provide a Water Resistive Barrier (W.R.B.) - drainage plane/cleavage layer over the level substrate, see Section 07 25 00 Weather Barriers.

3.7 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES – THIN PORCELAIN TILE
A. Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane (W.P.M) (Liquid-Applied):

Install waterproofing and crack isolation membrane in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1 (2.7 Waterproofing), ANSI A108.13, and ANSI A108.17. Review the installation and plan the application sequence. Pre-cut LATICRETE Waterproofing/AntiFracture Fabric (if required), allowing 2” (50mm) for overlap at ends and sides to fit the areas as required. Roll up the pieces for easy handling and placement. Shake or stir LATICRETE® HYDRO BAN® before using.

Pre-Treat Cracks and Joints - Fill all substrate cracks, cold joints and control joints to a smooth finish using a LATICRETE latex-fortified thin-set. Alternatively, a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN applied with a paint brush or trowel may be used to fill in nonstructural joints and cracks. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN approximately 8” (200mm) wide over substrate cracks, cold joints, and control joints using a paint brush or heavy napped paint roller.

Pre-Treat Coves and Floor/Wall Intersections - Fill all substrate coves and floor/wall transitions to a smooth finish and changes in plane using a LATICRETE latex-fortified thin-set. Alternatively, a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN applied with a paint brush or trowel may be used to fill in cove joints and floor/wall transitions <1/8” (3mm) in width. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN approximately 8” (200mm) wide over substrate cracks, cold joints, and control joints using a paint brush or heavy napped paint roller.

Pre-Treat Penetrations - Allow for a minimum 1/8” (3mm) space between drains, pipes, lights, or other penetrations and surrounding Ceramic tile, stone or brick. Pack any gaps around pipes, lights or other penetrations with a LATICRETE latex-fortified thin-set.

Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN around penetration opening. Cover the first coat with a second liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN. Bring

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1385
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-19
LATICRETE HYDRO BAN up to the level of tile or stone. When LATICRETE HYDRO BAN has dried to the touch seal with LATICRETE LATASIL™.

Main Application - Allow any pre-treated areas to dry to the touch. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE® HYDRO BAN® with a paint brush or heavy napped roller over substrate including pre-treated areas and allow to dry to the touch. Install another liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN over the first coat. Let the top coat of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN dry to the touch approximately 1 – 2 hours at 70°F (21°C) and 50% RH. When the top coat has dried to the touch inspect the surface for pinholes, voids, thin spots or other defects. LATICRETE HYDRO BAN will dry to an olive green color when fully cured.

Use additional LATICRETE HYDRO BAN to seal any defects.

Movement Joints - Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN, approximately 8” (200mm) wide over the areas. Then embed and loop the 6” (150mm) wide LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric and allow the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN liquid to bleed through. Immediately apply a second coat of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN. * Dry coat thickness is 20 – 30 mil (0.02 - 0.03” or 0.5 - 0.8mm); consumption per coat is approximately 0.01 gal/ft2 (approx. 0.4 L/m2); coverage is approximately 100 ft2 /gal (approx. 2.5 m2/ L). LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric can be used to pretreat cracks, joints, curves, corners, drains, and penetrations with LATICRETE HYDRO BAN.

Protection - Provide protection for newly installed membrane, even if covered with a thinbed Ceramic tile, stone or brick installation against exposure to rain or other water for a minimum of 2 hours at 70°F (21°C) and 50% RH. For temperatures between 45°F and 69°F (7°C to 21°C) allow a minimum 24 hour cure period.

Flood Testing - Allow membrane to cure fully before flood testing, typically a minimum 2 hours at 70°F (21°C) and 50% RH. Cold conditions will require a longer curing time. For temperatures between 50°F and 69°F (10°C to 21°C) allow a minimum 24 hour cure period prior to flood testing.

Use the following LATICRETE System Materials:

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN
References:

LATICRETE Detail Drawings: WP300, WP301, WP302, WP303
LATICRETE Data Sheets: 663.0, 663.5
LATICRETE MSDS: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN, Fabric
GREENGUARD Certificate: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN
LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 188, 189, 203

3.8 TILE ADHESIVE

1. Installer shall thoroughly review Technical Data Sheet and installation process with Butech Porcelanosa Grupo representative prior to installation and confirm that the adhesive is compatible with the overall bonded façade system including all products (including but not limited to grout, mortar, expansion joints, waterproofing, vapor barriers, etc.) from Laticrete or other selected

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1386
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-20
manufacturer’s.

2. Adhesive: Butech Porcelanosa Grupo “super-flex S2” for exterior large format, thin porcelain tiles, application shall confirm to manufacturer’s recommendations for coverage and notched trowel to use as a function of tile size and type.

3. Super-flex-S2 Technical Data Sheet:
https://www.butech.net/en/products/Adhesivos-cementosos/super-flex-s2

3.9 GENERAL SETTING OF TILE
A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as tile is set.

B. General: Fabricate tile units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated.

C. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. Shape beds to fit supports.

D. Cut and drill sinkage’s and holes in tile for anchors and supports per manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Gauge backs of all tiles for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. in area.

F. Use power saws to cut tile that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.

G. Sort tile before it is placed in wall to remove tile that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use.

H. Tile shall have a uniform appearance. Blend tile from several cartons during installation.

I. Set tile to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Set tile accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

J. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different tile sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/8 inch at narrowest points or more than 3/16 inch at widest points. Joints shall be tight joints over the entire tile installation area.

K. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated.

1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Sealing joints is specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." L. Install metal expansion strips in sealant joints at locations indicated. Build flanges of expansion strips into tile by embedding in mortar between tile and backup wythe.

Lap each joint 4 inches in the direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.

M. Place weep holes in joints where moisture may accumulate, including at flashing.

1. Use wicking material to form weep holes.

2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in tile sills. Turn

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1387
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-21
wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.

3. Space weep holes 16 inches O.C.

4. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with exterior wall face after mortar has set.

3.10 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.

B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.

D. Measure variation from level, plumb, and position shown in plan as a variation of the average plane of each tile face from level, plumb, or dimensioned plane.

E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated.

F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Tiles: Do not exceed one-half of tolerance specified for thickness of tile.

3.11 INSTALLATION – LARGE THIN PORCELAIN TILE
A. NOTES:

1. Exterior adhered veneer installation techniques can be performed in several ways depending upon the finish type. The WRB/Cleavage Plane, under fastened Lath & Cement Mortar method has been chosen.

2. The optimum conditions for installation of direct adhered cladding are temperatures between 60° and 80°F (16° and 27°C), with 50% relative humidity and minimal wind. However, these conditions are atypical, so provisions must be made for variations in climatic conditions.

3. Protection and corrective action primarily requires temporary enclosures or tarpaulins prior to, during, and immediately after installation to shield from rain. If prolonged exposure occurs, surfaces that appear dry may be saturated internally and require testing to determine suitability of certain overlay substrates, membranes or adhesives. Protection applies to the substrate, the installation of adhesives and joint grouts, post-installation (rain and temperature protection) until suitable cure, and also the storage and handling of the cladding material. For every 18°F (10°C) above 70°F (21°C) cementitious and epoxy materials cure twice as fast. For every 18°F (10°C) below 70°F (21°C) cementitious and epoxy materials take twice as long to cure.

4. In addition to installing waterproofing membrane where required, provide proper architectural detailing (water-stops, flashings, weeps, etc.) to conduct water to the building exterior, especially at critical areas such as window heads/sills, penetrations and parapet walls

5. Consult LATICRETE TDS 176M “Hot Weather Veneer Installations”, available at

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1388
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-22
www.laticrete.com, for more information.

B. General: Installation shall conform to this specification and Porcelanosa Butech bonded facades and adhesives written instructions and drawing details.

C. Comply with applicable ANSI 108 series of the "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile."
D. Comply with TCNA “Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation.” installation methods indicated or, if not other otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown.

E. Cut and fit porcelain tiles neatly around corners, fittings, and obstructions. Perimeter pieces to be minimum half tile width. Chipped, cracked, split pieces and edges are not acceptable. Make joints even, straight, plumb and of uniform width to tolerance +/- 1/16" over 8’ (1.5mm in 2.4m). Install divider strips at junction of wall tile and dissimilar materials.

F. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown.

G. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of stone without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of stone abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints.

H. Lay tile as shown on the Project Plan Exterior Elevations. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown.

I. Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including control, contraction and isolation joints, where indicated or as required by tile manufacturer and approved by Architect.

J. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with referenced installation standards and sealant manufacturer's instructions.

K. Tile Anchors / Seismic Clips: Provide stainless steel exposed seismic clips by Butech / Porcelanosa in accordance with Porcelanosa’s bonded wall/façade construction attachment clip details / Shop Drawings and as required by the local building official and approved by the project Engineer.

L. Lath & Plaster Method: Install cleavage membrane complying with current revision of ANSI A108.02 (3.8 Membrane or cleavage membrane). Install metal lath (3.4# Galvanized G90 coating Diamond wire) complying with the current revision of ANSI A108.01 (3.3 Requirements for lathing and Portland cement plastering), ANSI A108.02 (3.6 Metal lath) and A108.1A (1.0 – 1.2, 1.4, & 5.1). Apply latex-Portland cement mortar as scratch/leveling coat over wire lath, concrete or masonry in compliance with current revision of ANSI A108.01 (3.3.5.1) and A108.1A (1.4). Float surface of scratch/leveling coat plumb, true and allow mortar to cure for 72 hours at 70 degrees Fahrenheit / 21 degrees Celsius. For installation of large, thin porcelain tile, follow appropriate “Thin Bed Method.”

Use the following LATICRETE® System Materials:

LATICRETE 3701 Fortified Mortar
LATICRETE 254 Platinum
References:

LATICRETE Data Sheets: 100.0, 677.0
LATICRETE MSDS: 3701FMB, 254
GREENGUARD Certificates: 3701FMB, 254
LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 105, 106, 114, 118, 122, 130, 199, 204

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1389
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-23
M. Thin Bed Method (walls): Installations are to comply with current revisions of ANSI A108.02, A108.1B and ANSI A108.5. Select an appropriately sized ‘Euro-notch’ trowel (e.g., Tile Masters’ 1Y, 1YW, or 2YW trowels) or slant-notch trowel (e.g.

Raimondi 5/16” x 5/16” or 8mm x 8mm) that will provide full bedding and coverage to the backs of the tiles. Use flat side of trowel to apply the adhesive mortar into full contact with the substrate. Immediately following, apply mortar with notched side of trowel. Spread only as much mortar as can be covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. Mortar is to be applied to the panel backs using the notch side of the trowel. Trowel ridges on both the panel backs and substrate must be parallel to each other when panels are installed to assist in achieving 100% adhesive coverage to panel backs. Wall installations: Additionally, use vibrating palm sanders, with pads, to assist with releasing entrapped air from beneath the panels and ensure complete mortar coverage beneath the panel edges. Use mechanical edge-leveling systems to help minimize lippage between panel edges and ensure complete mortar coverage under panel edges. Consult edge-leveling system manufacturer for detailed instructions on use of their various systems. Clean excess latex Portland-cement mortar from faces of porcelain slabs and joints between pieces, immediately. Allow installation to cure for minimum 72 hours at 70° F (21° C), prior to grouting.

Use the following LATICRETE® System Materials:

LATICRETE® 254 Platinum

References:

LATICRETE Data Sheet: 677.0
LATICRETE MSDS: 254
GREENGUARD Certificate: 254
LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 105, 118, 129, 209

3.12 GROUTING
Provide tile grouting per tile manufacturer’s recommendations. Two Alternatives have been specified:

1. ALT 1: Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Grouting Epoxy (ANSI A118.3):

Follow manufacturer‘s recommendations for minimum cure time prior to grouting. Store liquid components of LATICRETE® SPECTRALOCK® PRO Premium Grout† for 24 hours @ 70-80°F (21-27°C) prior to use to facilitate mixing and application. Substrate temperature must be 40-95°F (4-35°C). Verify joints are free of dirt, debris or grout spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off tile faces and remove water standing in joints.

Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough textured Ceramic tile, pavers, bricks, stone or trim units that are not hot paraffin coated to facilitate cleaning. Cut open pouch and pour LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout Part A Liquid into a clean mixing pail. Then open pouch and pour LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout Part B Liquid into the mixing pail. Mix by hand or with a slow speed (<300 rpm) mixer until the two liquids are well blended. Then, while mixing, add LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK Grout Part C Powder and blend until uniform.

For narrow joints, it is acceptable to leave out up to 10% of the LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK Grout Part C Powder to produce a more fluid mix. Install LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.13) and ANSI A108.6 (3.0 - 4.0). Spread using a sharp edged, firm rubber float and work grout into joints. Using strokes diagonal (at 45° angle) to the grout lines,

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1390
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-24
pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Then hold float face at a 90° angle to grouted surface and use float edge to "squeegee" off excess grout, stroking diagonally to avoid pulling grout out of filled joints. Once excess grout is removed, a thin film/haze will be left. Initial cleaning of the remaining film/haze can begin approximately 20 minutes after grouting (wait longer when temperatures are cooler). Begin by mixing one cleaning additive packet with 2 gallons (7.6 L) of clean water in a clean bucket to make cleaning solution. Dip a clean sponge into the bucket and then wring out cleaning solution until sponge is damp. Using a circular motion, lightly scrub grouted surfaces with the damp sponge to loosen grout film/haze. Then drag sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surfaces to remove froth. Rinse sponge frequently and change cleaning solution at least every 50 ft2 (4.7m2). Discard sponges as they become "gummy" with residue. Check work as you clean and repair any low spots with additional grout. One (1) hour after finishing first cleaning, clean the same area again following the same procedure but utilizing a clean white scrub pad and fresh cleaning solution. Rinse scrub pad frequently.

Drag a clean sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surfaces to remove froth. Use each side of sponge only once before rinsing and change cleaning solution at least every 50 ft2 (4.7m2). Allow cleaned areas to dry and inspect tile/stone surface. For persistent grout film/haze (within 24 hours), repeat scrubbing procedure with undiluted white vinegar and clean pad. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. Inspect grout joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed LATICRETE® SPECTRALOCK® PRO Premium Grout†. Cautions: Do not use undiluted white vinegar on polished marble or limestone unless a test spot in an inconspicuous area indicates no change in finish appearance; do not use acid cleaners on epoxy grout less than 7 days old.

Use the following LATICRETE System Materials:

LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout
References:

LATICRETE Data Sheets: 681.0, 681.5
LATICRETE MSDS: Premium Part A, Premium Part B, Part C Powder, Cleaning Additive
GREENGUARD Certificate: PRO
LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 111, 198, 212, 400

2. ALT 2: Porcelanosa Grupo Butech Two-Component Epoxy Grout:

N. Preparing the Grout: The Contractor shall refer to the BUTECH Technical Data Sheet including Supplementary Instructions for installation instructions for “epotech aqua” a two-component epoxy grout (putty). Both components are supplied in the same package with the proportions ready to be mixed. Proportions are the following:

Component A epoxy putty 66.6% 1.0 kg
Component B catalyst 33.3% 0.5 kg
O. Do not add any other components to the mix. Below are the instructions for preparing this adhesive:

C. Prepare tile-joint surfaces for grouting by removing dust and mortar particles.

D. Use clean tools and containers.

E. Shake the catalyst well.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1391
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-25
F. Mix according to the proportions indicated, making sure all the catalyst is added to the mix. Add component B to component A
G. Carry out a first mixing with a masonry trowel so that the catalyst wets the epoxy putty as much as possible.

H. Mix with an electric mortar mixer at low speed (400 rpm) until you get a creamy, even, and lumpless mass. Use a spiral mixing paddle for epoxy putties.

I. Stir with the trowel and apply.

J. Do not add any other components to the mix.

K. In case the epoxy putty to be used is less than 1,5 kg, use a scale to weigh the quantities to be used and mix at the indicated proportions.

P. Applying the grouting material. Before starting to seal the installation joints, make sure the adhesive has finished setting and that the moisture on the tile back has been eliminated, especially when it comes to laying mosaics or large format and low absorption tiles with minimal installation joint.

Q. Precautions: “epotech aqua” is a two-component putty that once hardened is virtually impossible to clean, so we recommend paying extremely close attention to the drying times. Do not, under any circumstance, let the putty harden on the wall covering. We recommend taking the following precautions:

C. Do not use on substrates which are not totally dry or subject to rise of humidity.

Make sure the installation joint is completely dry.

D. Check that there are no elements in the installation joints that could interfere with the grouting material. The joints must be clean from bonding material and have a uniform depth throughout their length of at least 3/4 the tile thickness.

E. Clean off any dust or dirt remains there might be on the wall tile panel.

F. In the event of high temperatures, strong air currents, or very absorbent ceramic tiles, wet the joints previously with clean water before applying the putty.

G. Protect all elements present in the wall covering that are sensitive to epoxy putty attack.

H. Do not use metal tools that may scratch the tile surface.

R. The recommended applying technique is the following:

C. Spread the product and press using the hard rubber trowel, until the joints are completely filled. Take off the excess of product with the same trowel, moving the tool diagonally from the tiles.

D. Immediately, clean excess of grouting material with an abrasive sponge for epoxy putties slightly wet.

E. Pass the sponge diagonally over the joints and rinse in clear water as much as it is needed. Before using the sponge, wring out as much as possible; use the least water possible.

F. Repeat the cleaning of the tile with a sponge or dampened cloth with a 50% mix of clear water and denatured alcohol. Always heed the cleaning times.

S. As a general rule, it is not recommended to leave installation joints smaller than 1.5 mm indoors and 5 mm outdoors. There are currently a wide range of spacers and separators that make the work of the tile layer easier, but we highly recommend Butech’s self-leveling separators which, in addition to marking the joint width, avoid

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1392
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-26
the appearance of ledges between tiles, and laying defects.

T. Health and Safety: epotech aqua is a corrosive chemical which can cause an irritating effect on skin and mucous membranes. The Installer shall refer to the MSDS data sheet and take careful precautions in the use of these chemicals, including but not limited to the use of gloves and goggles. The installer shall be extremely cautious when handling and applying it.

U. Cleaning and Maintenance: Follow Manufacturers recommendations.

3.13 Expansion and Control Joints:

A. Provide control or expansion joints as located in contract drawings and in full conformity, especially in width and depth, with architectural details.

1. Substrate joints must carry through, full width, to surface of tile work.

2. Install expansion joints in tile work over construction/cold joints or control joints in substrates.

3. Install expansion joints where tiles abut restraining surfaces (such as perimeter walls, curbs, columns), changes in plane and corners.

4. Joint width and spacing depends on application - follow TCNA “Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation” Detail "EJ-171 Expansion Joints" or consult sealant manufacturer for recommendation based on project parameters.

5. Joint width: ≥ ⅛” (3mm) and ≤ 1” (25mm).

6. Joint width: depth ~2:1 but joint depth must be ≥ ⅛” (3mm) and ≤ ½” (12mm).

7. Layout (field defined by joints): 1:1 length: width is optimum but must be ≤ 2:1.

Remove all contaminants and foreign material from joint spaces/surfaces, such as dirt, dust, oil, water, frost, setting/grouting materials, sealers and old sealant/backer.

Use LATICRETE® LATASIL™ 9118 Primer for permanent wet area installations.

Install appropriate backing material (e.g., closed cell backer rod) based on expansion joint design and as specified in section 07 92 00. Apply masking tape to face of tiles for protection during sealant application. Use caulking gun, or other applicator, to completely fill joints with sealant. Within 5-10 minutes of filling joint, ‘tool’ sealant surface to a smooth finish. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling joint. Wipe excess sealant off all surfaces immediately.

Use the following LATICRETE System Materials:

LATICRETE LATASIL
LATICRETE LATASIL 9118 Primer
References:

LATICRETE Detail Drawings: WP300, WP301, WP302, WP303, EJ-01, EJ-06, EJ-08, EJ-09, EJ-10, EJ-12, EJ-13, EJ-14
(Sealant treatments only)
LATICRETE Data Sheets: 6200.1, 6526.1
LATICRETE MSDS: LATASIL, Primer
LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 211, 252

3.14 ADJUSTING

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1393
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-27
A. Adjusting: Correction of defective work for a period of one (1) year following substantial completion, return to job and correct all defective work. Defective work includes, without limitation, tiles broken in normal abuse due to deficiencies in setting bed, loose tiles or grout, and all other defects which may develop as a result of poor workmanship.

B. Remove and replace tile of the following description:

C. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged tile. Tile may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.

D. Defective joints.

E. Tile not matching approved samples and mockups.

F. Tile not complying with other requirements indicated.

C. Replace in a manner that results in tile matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

D. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean tile as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

3.15 CLEANING
A. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean tile per tile and grout manufacturer’s recommendations and as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on Mockup Panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning tile.

3. Protect adjacent tile and other surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean tile by bucket and brush hand-cleaning.

6. Clean tile with proprietary acidic cleaner ONLY WHEN NECESSARY AND ONLY applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.16 SEALING
A. Tile Sealer: Apply sealer over entire tile assembly, as required in accordance with tile manufacturer’s instructions.

3.17 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Division 1. To avoid damage to finished tile work, schedule floor installations to begin only after all structural work, building enclosure, and overhead finishing work are completed.

B. Due to the slow rate of Portland cement hydration and strength development at low temperatures, protect installations exposed to these conditions from traffic for longer than normal periods. Protect newly installed exterior adhered veneer installations from direct exposure to rain for 7 days at 70 degrees Fahrenheit / 21 degrees Celsius.

Protection applies to the substrate, the installation of adhesives and joint grouts, postinstallation (rain and temperature protection) until suitable cure, and the storage and handling of the cladding material. Extend period of protection of tile work at lower

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1394
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ADHERED TILE CLADDING 09 34 13-28
temperatures, below 60°F (15°C), and at high relative humidity (>70% R.H.) due to retarded set times of mortar/adhesives. For every 18°F (10°C) below 70°F (21°C) cementitious and epoxy materials take twice as long to cure. Large format tiles require longer curing periods in cooler temperatures. Keep all traffic off the finished work until full cure. Suitable protection is to be included in the scope of work. Each component must reach a proper cure prior to installing the subsequent installation product.

C. Tent / shade and heat areas that will be subjected to the elements or freezing temperatures during installation and cure periods.

D. Replace or restore work of other trades damaged or soiled by work under this section.

3.18 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. Excess Tile: Stack excess tile where directed by Owner for Owner's use.

B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean tile waste, including mortar and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush tile waste to less than 4 inches in greatest dimension.

2. Mix tile waste with at least 2 parts of specified fill material for each part of tile waste.

3. Do not dispose of tile waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Excess Tile Waste: Remove excess clean tile waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

PART 4 – HEALTH AND SAFETY
The use of personal protection such as rubber gloves, suitable dust masks, safety glasses and industrial clothing is highly recommended. Discarded packaging, product wash and wastewater should be disposed of as per local, state or federal regulations.

END OF SECTION 09 34 13

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1395
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23-1
SECTION 09 67 23 - RESINOUS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General and Technical Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Provide a complete epoxy floor system for concrete surfaces that meet the requirements for specific use indicated in the contract documents. Include all applicable substrate testing, surface preparation, and detail work.

2. Patching compound for floor preparation and slope.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for concrete subfloor for resinous flooring systems.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data, Available Color Charts, application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.

C. CALGreen Submittals: Submit product data in accordance with Division 1.

1. Product Data for CALGreen 5.504.4.3 Paints and Coatings: Product data and material safety data sheets (MSDS) for paints and coatings used on the interior of the building indicating VOC content of each product used.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish color and sheen as required for approval by Architect.

E. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.

B. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1396
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23-2
C. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring system.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of flooring systems required for this Project. Retain subparagraph below with requirements for Installer certificates in "Informational Submittals" Article.

1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.

2. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this section.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer.

Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

C. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 48-inch- square floor area selected by Architect. a. Include 48-inch length of integral cove base with inside corner.

2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for Architect's review of mockups.

3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application.

B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1397
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23-3
lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

D. Concrete shall be tested for moisture before applying seamless coating. Water vapor transmission upwards through on-grade concrete slabs may result in loosening of epoxy floors or improper curing of epoxy materials. If moisture emissions exceed 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet contact the manufacturer before application.

E. Concrete must be at least 2500 psi and feel like 30 or 50 grit sandpaper.

F. Concrete must be cured for a minimum of 28 days before coating is applied.

G. Schedule coating work to avoid excessive dust and airborne contaminates. Protect work areas from excessive dust and airborne contaminates during coating application.

H. Before any work is started, the applicator shall examine all surfaces for any deficiencies.

Should any deficiencies exist, the Owner’s Representative shall be notified in writing and any corrections necessary shall be made.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. A written warranty from the manufacturer against defects of materials for a period of 1 (one) year
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Westcoat Specialty Coatings; 770 Gateway Center Drive, San Diego, CA 92102. Telephone 800-250-4519. Fax 619-262-8606. Web Site: www.westcoat.com.

B. Other Manufacturers: Alternatively provide equal products by one of the following:

1. Crown Polymers.

2. Crossfield Products Corp.

3. Or Equal
C. Follow Substitution procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions (GP 4.20).

2.2 CALGREEN REQUIREMENT
A. 5.504.4.3, architectural paints and coatings shall comply with Table 5.504.4.3, unless more stringent local limits apply. This requirement applies to floor coatings.

2.3 INDUSTRIAL RESINOUS FLOORING
A. Resinous Flooring: Abrasion-, impact- and chemical-resistant, industrial-aggregate- filled, resinbased, monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral cove base.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1398
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23-4
B. System Characteristics:

1. Westcoat DUBRO Quartz [ALT: Standard] Epoxy System: Thin Film EC-32 (ALT: EC-34) with CA-31 Large Safe Grip. 100% solids double broadcast epoxy floor coating system with quartz [ALT: silica] sand broadcasted into the clear base coat and sealed with clear epoxy. [Note: Price for DUBRO Quartz Epoxy System]

2. Color and Pattern: Provide field samples to be approved by Architect a. Option 1: Granite (104)
b. Option 2: Shadow (107)
c. [ALT: Option 3: Pewter Grey with silica sand and EC-34 Epoxy] d. Provide Westcoat range of available color charts for Owner selection.

3. Wearing Surface: Textured for slip resistance.

4. Overall System Thickness: 1/8 inch.

5. Provide at the following locations:
a. Facilities Building: Restrooms 1 & 2 - with Speed Cove Epoxy Coated base. b. Facilities Building: Storage Room - with Speed Cove Epoxy Coated base.

C. Components:

1. Resin: Thin Film: 100% Solids Double Quartz Broadcast Epoxy.

2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.

3. Application Method: Troweled or screeded.
a. Primer: EC-15 Epoxy Moisture Vapor Barrier Primer 250-300 square feet per gallon. b. Base Coat: EC-32 Clear [ALT: EC-34 Standard] Epoxy Topcoat 125-150 square feet per gallon.
c. Broadcast TC-65 Quartz Sand aggregate 100 square feet per 50 pounds. d. Second Coat: EC-32 Clear [ALT: EC-34 Standard] Epoxy Topcoat 75-100 square feet per gallon
e. Broadcast TC-65 Quartz Sand aggregate 100 square feet per 50 pounds f. Top Coat: EC-32 Clear [ALT: EC-34 Standard] Epoxy Topcoat 100-150 square feet per gallon.
g. Second Topcoat: Sealing or finish coat:

1. Resin: EC-95F Polyurethane Topcoat.

2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.

3. Type: Clear.

4. Finish: Matte.

5. Coverage- 200-400 sf per gallon.

4. Aggregates: Washed and kiln dried 30-mesh colored quartz [ALT: silca] sand (sourced locally), broadcast to refusal.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1399
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23-5
D. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated:

1. Compressive Strength: 6871 per ASTM C 579.

2. Tensile Strength: 1572 per ASTM C 307.

3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 882,882 per ASTM C 580.

4. Impact Resistance: No chipping, cracking, or delamination and not more than 1/16-inch permanent indentation per MIL-D-3134.

5. Resistance to Elevated Temperature: No slip or flow of more than 1/16 inch per MIL-D3134.

6. Flammability: Self-extinguishing per ASTM D 635.

7. Hardness: 70 Shore D per ASTM D 2240.

2.4 PATCHING AND SLOPE COMPOUND (Only needed if floors do not slope to drain) A. Westcoat TC Slope & Patch System and WP-82: acrylic cement and cement modifier including:

1. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coats indicated.

2. Patch cement.

3. Cement Modifier.

2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Waterproofing Membrane: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and primer and body coats indicated.

B. Seam tape for crack repair.

2.7 PRECAST COVE BASE SYSTEM (PL-3)
A. Product: Speed Cove Precast Cove Base System (4” tall), or equal. Provide manufacturer’s recommended adhesive. Provide Wire Tape, or equal, to maintain a crisp line between resinous flooring and wall surface above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1400
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23-6
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring.

1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:
a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.
b. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent.

2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. of slab area in 24 hours. b. Perform plastic sheet test, ASTM D 4263. Proceed with application only after testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates.
c. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing.

C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.1 APPLICATION
A. Install precast cove base system and coatings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.

2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1401
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23-7

3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

D. Prepare substrates with patch and slope compound where required for positive drainage to floor drains. Mix and install per manufacturer’s written instructions.

E. Apply waterproofing membrane, where indicated, in manufacturer's recommended thickness.

1. Apply waterproofing membrane to integral cove base substrates.

F. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and details including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and top coating of cove base. Round internal and external corners.

1. Integral Cove Base: Varies, 4 inches nominal as indicated on drawings.

G. Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method recommended by manufacturer.

H. Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids in surface of final body coat and to produce wearing surface indicated.

I. Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer.

3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.

Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 09 67 23

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1402
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-1
SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Surface preparation and painting of all interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout the building, unless specifically indicated otherwise.

2. Refer to surface finish schedule.

B. Related Sections:

1. Refer to various other Sections for identification of shop primed items.

2. Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing for structural steel.

3. Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications for metal fabrication steel coatings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed: Exposed items and surfaces are defined as those which may be seen while standing on any floor, the roof, or in any occupied space.

B. Exterior: On the outside; exposed to the outside air or weather, either directly or indirectly.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: Follow procedures outlined in Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Schedule: Submit a schedule listing each coat and manufacturer's product number for all finishing products. Provide all architectural paint products manufactured by the same manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data on paints and coatings indicating VOC content. Submit manufacturer's application instructions.

1. Include MSDS sheets for paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.

C. Samples: Submit three samples 8 x 10 inch in size illustrating each color and texture for each surface finish scheduled, made from actual paint to be used.

D. Qualification Data: Submit for applicator.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with documented experience and approved by product manufacturer.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Flammability: Conform to 2019 California Building Code, for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1403
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-2

2. VOC Content: Conform to CCR Title 24, Part 11 (CALGreen), Section 5.504.4.3 "Pollution Control - Paints and Coatings", and Bay Area Air Quality Management District for air pollution control requirements.

3. Aerosol paints and coatings shall meet the Product-Weighted MIR Limits for ROC in Section 94522(a)(3) and other requirements, including prohibitions on use of certain toxic compounds and ozone depleting substances (5.504.4.3.1) C. Field Samples: Provide field sample panels, 4 x 4 foot minimum size, illustrating coating color, texture, and finish. Field samples may be requested for any and all paint finishes. Locate where directed. Architect may require one color adjustment of each field sample color on the wall at no cost to the Owner. Accepted samples may remain as part of the Work.

D. Labeling: Include following on label of each container:

1. Manufacturer's name and product name.

2. Generic type of paint.

3. Manufacturer's stock number.

4. Color.

5. Instructions for reducing, where applicable.

E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting before application of painting materials, to be attended by the paint supplier, painting applicator, Contractor, Owner’s Representative and Architect to discuss application methods, substrate and preparation, desired mil thicknesses, and other topics related to achieving the quality of finish desired.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. Remove immediately any item rejected by the Architect.

B. Container labeling shall include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

D. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings in rain, fog, mist, or snow; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for interiors; 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1404
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-3
D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface during application and inspection of the work.

E. Mix materials in ventilated areas as directed. Remove all empty containers, waste and contaminated rags from premises at end of each working day.

F. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated.

1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Gypsum Board: Verify with Section 092900 that skim coat has been applied to surfaces scheduled to receive semi-gloss and gloss paints. Do not proceed until completed.

1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Furnish one gallon of each color and type of paint used to Owner. Tightly seal and clearly label containers. Label each container with color and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all products from the same manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Kelly Moore "Enviro Coat" or “Premium Professional”.

2. Dunn Edwards "Ecoshield".

3. Benjamin Moore "Eco Spec".

4. Sherwin Williams "Health Spec".

5.Or equal.

B. Base the bid on providing up to 3 paint colors, with up to 1 deep tone color, consisting of any combined mix of gloss enamel, satin enamel, eggshell enamel, or flat latex. Each office wall surface, soffit, ceiling, or plane will consist of only one color or type paint, unless otherwise shown.

2.2 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Paints:

1. Definition: "Paint" as used herein means coating systems including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.

2. Quality: Use only pure, unadulterated, first quality materials. If manufacturer makes more than one quality of material, use only their best quality.

3. Compatibility: Use primers and succeeding coats of any given system from the same manufacturer, that are compatible with one another and with the substrate, and which are approved by the manufacturer, unless specifically scheduled otherwise. No thinning, reducing, or changing of mix is permitted unless specifically indicated herein.

B. For interior applications use paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D, and the following chemical restrictions:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1405
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-4

1. Architectural paints, coatings, and primers applied to interior walls and ceilings: Do not exceed the VOC limits established in Green Seal Standard GS-11, Paints, Edition

4.0, September 27, 2021.
a. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
b. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: 100 g/L.
c. Non-Flat High Gloss Coatings: 150 g/L.
d. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoats: 100 g/L.

2. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates: VOC not more than 250 g/L, established in Green Seal Standard GS-11, Paints, Edition 4.0, September 27, 2021.

3. Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, sealers and shellacs applied to interior elements: Do not exceed the VOC limits established in South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, February 5, 2016. a. Floor Coatings: 50 g/L.
b. General Purpose Sealers: 200 g/L.
c. Stains: 250 g/L.
d. Waterproofing Sealers: 100 g/L.
e. Sanding Sealers: 275 g/L.
f. Clear Wood Varnishes: 275 g/L.
g. Lacquers: 275 g/L

4. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

5. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1406
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-5
y. Vinyl chloride.

C. General Purpose Filler: Standard spackling compound or gypsum wallboard joint compound or latex patching compound; for patching gypsum wallboard.

D. Cementitious Filler: Nonshrink formulation; white portland cement with fine silicate aggregate, zinc-oxide pigment, and reinforcing chemical binder as approved.

E. Accessory Materials: Paint thinners, turpentine, linseed oil, shellac, and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality, as recommended by each manufacturer for his respective product.

F. Equipment: Provide scaffolding, staging, drop cloths, covers, brushes, rollers, and spraying and other equipment of type, grade, and size required for proper execution of the Work.

2.3 COLORS AND FINISHES
A. Use only materials capable of achieving the finishes and colors specified and scheduled.

B. Finish Sheens: Within MPI Standard; reflectance tested at 60 degrees in accordance with ASTM D523.

1. Gloss Level 1 - Flat: <3

2. Gloss Level 2 - Low Sheen: 5-10

3. Gloss Level 3 - Eggshell: 10-15

4. Gloss Level 4 - Satin: 25-35

5. Gloss Level 5 - Semi-Gloss: 50-55

6. Gloss Level 6 - Gloss: 70-80

7. Gloss Level 7 - Gloss: >85
C. If the Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer's materials other than those for which specific color selections are made, match the specified colors exactly.

D. Paint colors are intended to be correct for next-to-last coat. Final approved color selections will be close to, but may vary slightly from, samples indicated.

2.4 PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Schedule: Only major areas are scheduled. Treat miscellaneous and similar items and areas within room or space with similar system.

B. Number of Coats: Where number of coats is specified, it is only as a minimum requirement. Apply additional coats, at no additional cost to Owner, if necessary to completely hide base material, produce uniform color, and provide satisfactory finish result.

C. Systems Specifications: These specifications are a guide and are meant to establish procedure and quality. Confer with Architect to determine exact finish desired.

D. Acceptance of Final Colors: Do not apply final coats of paint for both exterior and interior systems until colors have been accepted by Architect.

E. Exterior Painting Systems:

1. Polyurethane Enamel Coating System:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1407
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-6
a. Prime Coat: Shop-applied under other applicable Sections. Touch up shop primer where needed with Ameron 385 Epoxy primer or Devoe Bar-Rust 235V Surface Tolerant Epoxy.
b. Finish Coats: Tnemec's Series 1075 (1074) Endura-Shield, Devoe Devthane 378H Aliphatic Urethane Semi-Gloss or Ameron Amershield 450SA, semi-gloss (gloss) sheen, 2.5 mils dry film thickness.

2. Galvanized Steel, Zinc-Rich Painted Steel, and Aluminum: (see also Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications)
a. Prime Coat: Kelly-Moore KM5725 DTM Acrylic Primer Finish. b. Body Coat: Kelly-Moore 1215 Color Shield Exterior Acrylic Semi- Gloss Enamel. KM 5885 DTM High Performance Acrylic Semi- Gloss Enamel c. Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1215 Color Shield Exterior Acrylic Semi- Gloss Enamel. KM 5885 DTM High Performance Acrylic Semi- Gloss Enamel

3. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board:
a. Prime Coat: Kelly-Moore 247 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Masonry Primer. b. Body Coat: Kelly-Moore 1240 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat Paint or 1245 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Low Sheen Finish. c. Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1240 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat Paint or 1245 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Low Sheen Finish.

F. Interior Painting Systems:

1. Cementitious Surfaces:
a. Enamel:
1) Prime Coat: Kelly-Moore 971 Acry-Plex Interior PVA
Primer/Sealer.
2) Body Coat: Kelly-Moore 1010 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or 1650 Acry-Plex 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.
3) Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1010 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or 1650 Acry-Plex 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.

2. Gypsum Board:
a. Enamel:
1) Prime Coat: Kelly-Moore 971 Acry-Plex Interior PVA
Primer/Sealer.
2) Body Coat: Kelly-Moore 1010 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or 1050 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1408
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-7
3) Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1010 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or 1050 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.
b. Acrylic Epoxy Finish:
1) Prime Coat: Kelly-Moore 971 Acry-Plex Interior PVA
Primer/Sealer.
2) Finish Coats: -Devoe Tru-Glaze – WB 4426 semi-gloss
epoxy finish , not less than 3 mils dry film thickness. Sierra Performance S-16 Epoxy Acrylic Wall & Trim Semi- Gloss
Enamel.

3. Metal:
a. Enamel:
1) Prime Coat: Shop-applied under other applicable Section. (Touch up with KM 5725 DTM Acrylic Primer Finish.
2) Body Coat: Same as finish coat.
3) Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1650 Acry-Plex 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.KM 5885 DTM High Performance
Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel
b. Acrylic Epoxy Finish:
1) Prime Coat: Shop-applied under other applicable
Sections.
2) Finish Coats: Devoe Tru-Glaze-WB 4426 Semi-Gloss
Epoxy Finish, not less than 3 mils DFT.

Sierra Performance S-16 Epoxy Acrylic Wall & Trim SemiGloss Enamel.

4. Wood:
a. Prime Coat: Sierra Performance S-30 Griptec Multi-Surface Primer.
b. Body Coat: Kelly-Moore 1650 Acry-Plex 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.
c. Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1650 Acry-Plex 100% Acrylic SemiGloss Enamel.

5. Concrete Masonry Unit:
a. 1st Coat: DE Smooth BLOCFIL Premium Concrete Block Primer/filler. b. 2nd Coat: DE ACRI-WALL Interior Acrylic Eggshell

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1409
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-8
c. 3rd Coat: Same as 2nd coat.

G. Miscellaneous Interior Painting Systems:

1. Ductwork at Grilles and Diffusers: Flat black Satin Glide 128-200 latex enamel or Kelly-Moore 1240-407 Flat Carbon (Black). Apply to visible interior surfaces of ductwork.

2. Exposed Insulated Pipes and Ductwork:
a. Sealer: 1 coat Kelly-Moore 971 Acry-Plex Interior PVA Primer/Sealer. Omit sealer where glass fabric jackets are used. b. Body and Finish Coats: As specified for exposed non-insulated pipes, conduits, and ductwork.

3. Exposed Non-Insulated Pipes and Ductwork: Including conduit. a. Cast-Iron Pipe:
1) Prime Coat: KM 5725 DTM Acrylic Primer Finish
2) Body Coat: Same as finish coat.
3) Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1010 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or 1050 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.
b. Other Pipes, Conduit, and Ductwork:
1) Prime Coat: As specified for ferrous and non-ferrous metals as applicable.
2) Body Coat: Same as finish coat.
3) Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1010 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or 1050 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.

4. Factory Finished Equipment: Satisfactorily refinish surfaces damaged before, during, or after installation as directed; use Kelly-Moore 1050 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.

5. Finish Hardware: Specified with USP finish under Section 087100, paint as specified for metal. Color and gloss to match doors and frames as applicable, unless otherwise specified.

6. Plywood Backing: In Telephone and Electric Closets; one coat KellyMoore 1010 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel or 1050 KM

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1410
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-9
Professional Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.

7. Protective Overspray: On sprayed-on fireproofing; 2 coats Kelly-Moore 485 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Flat Wall Paint.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1411
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:

1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.

2. Concrete: 12 percent.

3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.

D. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. General:

1. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

2. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.

3. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.

B. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

C. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.

D. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

E. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.

F. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Touch-up primed steel frame immediately after erection, including end of beam plates. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.

G. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.

H. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair.

I. Concrete Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1412
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-11

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces.

B. Neatly mask door and frame rating labels and equipment labels.

3.4 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.

1. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

3. Apply each coat to uniform finish and mil thickness. Apply each coat following manufacturer's recommended minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT).

4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.

5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed equipment. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.

9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior.

10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method.

2. Allow each coat to dry before next coat is applied, as recommended by manufacturer.

3. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface, sand between applications.

4. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1413
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-12

5. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive the same dry film thickness as flat surfaces.

C. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Equipment:

1. Paint shop primed equipment. Do not paint identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment.

2. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.

3. In occupied spaces, prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished. Such items are not required to be painted in mechanical rooms.

4. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convectors that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convectors to match louver face panels.

5. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.

6. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.

D. Painting Doors and Frames:

1. Paint doors and frames same color on both sides and edges, unless otherwise noted on the door schedule.

2. Where doors are scheduled to be painted two colors, paint the edges to match the face toward which the door swings.

3. Where frames are scheduled to be painted two colors, the joint between colors shall occur behind the edge of the door where the stop meets the frame.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests: Provide testing of mil thickness of coatings and finishes. All field painting is subject to verification of mil thickness.

3.6 CLEANING
A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.

F. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris.

G. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. Remove empty paint containers from site.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1414
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-13

3.7 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (RAL, Benjamin Moore, or Kelly Moore numbers typical as approved in the field by Owner and Architect) A. Shop-Primed Ferrous Metal (Excluding Structural Steel – See Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing) (Gloss Latex):

1. Touch-up damaged priming: WB SYN-LUSTRO Premium Interior/Exterior Rust Preventative Metal Primer, 100% Acrylic

2. 2nd Coat: DE SPARTAGLOSS W7600V Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss

3. 3rd Coat: Same as 2nd coat.

B. Galvannealed Metals (Gloss Acrylic): Color Varies, see specific item, to be selected by Architect from samples.

1. 1st Coat: WB SYN-LUSTRO Premium Interior/Exterior Rust Preventative Metal Primer, 100% Acrylic

2. 2nd Coat: DE SPARTAGLOSS W7600V Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss

3. 3rd Coat: Same as 2nd coat.

E. Hollow Metal Doors (Gloss Acrylic): Color Varies, to be selected by Architect from samples as specified below.

1. 1st Coat: WB SYN-LUSTRO Premium Interior/Exterior Rust Preventative Metal Primer, 100% Acrylic

2. 2nd Coat: DE SPARTAGLOSS W7600V Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss

3. 3rd Coat: Same as 2nd coat.

4. Colors:
a. Restroom Door and Frame exterior faces and edges: Color to match adjacent tile to be selected by Architect from a range of (3) color samples. b. Restroom Door and Frame interior faces: Color to match adjacent tile to be selected by Architect from a range of (3) color samples. c. Mechanical Room Door and Frame exterior and interior faces: Color to match adjacent tile to be selected by Architect from a range of (3) color samples.

3.8 SCHEDULE – INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (RAL, Benjamin Moore, or Kelly Moore numbers typical as approved in the field by Owner and Architect) A. Shop-Primed Ferrous Metal (Semigloss Enamel): Varies

1. Prime Coat: Shop-applied under other applicable Section. (Touch up with KM 5725 DTM Acrylic Primer Finish.

2. Body Coat: Same as finish coat.

3. Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1650 Acry-Plex 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.KM 5885 DTM High Performance Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1415
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PAINTING
09 91 00-14
B. Gypsum Board at Storage and Mechanical Room Building Walls (Eggshell Enamel): KMW 46 Acoustic White or as selected by the Architect.

1. Prime Coat: Kelly-Moore 971 Acry-Plex Interior PVA Primer/Sealer.

2. Body Coat: Kelly-Moore 1010 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel.

3. Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1010 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel.

C. Gypsum Board at Facilities Building Skylight Lightwells (Restroom and Mechanical Room) (Flat Enamel): KMW 46 Acoustic White or as selected by the Architect.

1. Prime Coat: Kelly-Moore 971 Acry-Plex Interior PVA Primer/Sealer.

2. Body Coat: Kelly-Moore 1005 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Flat Enamel.

3. Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1005 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Flat Enamel.

D. Gypsum Board at Facilities Building Ceilings (Restroom, Mechanical, and Storage Room) (Flat Enamel): KMW 46 Acoustic White or as selected by the Architect.

1. Prime Coat: Kelly-Moore 971 Acry-Plex Interior PVA Primer/Sealer.

2. Body Coat: Kelly-Moore 1005 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Flat Enamel.

3. Finish Coat: Kelly-Moore 1005 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Flat Enamel.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit (Eggshell Acrylic): Color as selected by Architect.

1. 1st Coat: DE Smooth BLOCFIL Premium Concrete Block Primer/filler.

2. 2nd Coat: DE ACRI-WALL Interior Acrylic Eggshell

3. 3rd Coat: Same as 2nd coat.

END OF SECTION 09 91 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1416
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ANTI GRAFFITI COATING 09 96 23-1
SECTION 09 96 23 - ANTI GRAFFITI COATING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this section.

B. Description: This Section includes the application of an anti-graffiti coating system to protect the above-grade exterior surfaces including, but not limited to:

1. Stained or “specially finished” concrete (as indicated on elevations)

2. CMU walls (as indicated on elevations)

3. Porcelain and Ceramic Tile (Interior and Exterior).

4. Custom Site Benches and Furniture

5. Any other exterior architectural element(s) as indicated on elevations C. Coatings: As used herein, means all graffiti resistant coating system materials, including base coatings and top coating required to achieve the performance requirements of this Section

1. Clear (transparent) graffiti resistant coating.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
B. Section 04 22 00 - Unit Masonry
C. Section 09 91 00 – Painting

1.3 SUSTAINABILITY
A. As required in California 2022 Green Building Standards Code, Chapter 5, Architectural paints and coatings shall comply with VOC limits in Table 1 of the ARB Architectural Coatings Suggested Control Measure, as shown in Table 5.504.4.3, unless more stringent local limits apply.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. Coatings must comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113 VOC limits for Architectural Coatings.

B. ASTM D2369-92 - Test methods for Volatile Contents of Coatings.

C. ASTM D3960-93 - Practice for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) Contents of Paints and Related Coatings.

D. ASTM B-1 17 and ASTM D-714 (Salt spray Test): 10,000 Hours.

E. ASTM D-522 (Flexibility Strength Test): Pass 3/8" mandrel.

F. ASTM D-968 (Abrasion Test): 10 liters of sand to abrade 1 mil of dry coating.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1417
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ANTI GRAFFITI COATING 09 96 23-2
G. ASTM E-96-93 (Vapor Transmission Test): Vapor is transmitted.

H. ASTM D-3359-90 (Adhesion Test): 5A
I. ASTM D-610-85 (Rust): Less than 0.03% degradation.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Base coating and graffiti resistant top coating shall each be a permanent coating system.

B. Product shall be suited to architectural aesthetics of substrate and shall come in clear or color with a choice of finishes including dead flat, semigloss, or high gloss.

1. Finishes-must be measurable on a 60 degree meter to read not greater than:
a. 5 flat finishes
b. 45 to 55 for semigloss finishes
c. not less than 75 for high gloss finishes
C. Anti-graffiti coating shall show no signs of deterioration or change of appearance after graffiti has been removed during the 20-year warranty period: i.e., no shadowing, ghosting, or staining of coating or substrate.

D. Anti-graffiti coating shall be non-yellowing, non-chalking, and UV resistant S. Graffiti removal product shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, biodegradable, and with a neutral pH with a range between 7.0 and 8.5.

E. Dirt pickup on the substrate shall not be increased by the application of the anti-graffiti system.

F. Anti-graffiti coatings shall conform to current City and State waste disposal regulations at date of installation.

G. Anti-graffiti coatings shall be AQMD/VOC compliant.

H. Anti-graffiti coating shall equal or exceed the following standards for the chemical materials listed:

1. (NE=No Effect)

MEK NE after 5 days
Acetic Acid 100% NE
Carboxylic Acide NE after 5 days
Sodium Hydroxide 100% NE
Phosphoric Acid 75% NE after 5 days
Aniline NE
Hydrochloric Acid 37% NE 4 hour blister
Toluene NE
Gasoline NE
Sulfuric Acid 50% NE after 5 days
Skydrol NE
Nitric Acid 20% NE 68 hour blister
Motor Oil NE
IPA NE
Acid Rain NE
MEK double rubs 500+

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1418
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ANTI GRAFFITI COATING 09 96 23-3

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets on products to be used for the Work.

1. Base Coating.

2. Anti-graffiti top coating.

3. Graffiti removal agent.

C. Test Report: If requested, submit copies of the following reports:

1. Certified test reports indicating compliance with the requirements of ASTM D-2369-92, ASTM D-3960-93, ASTM B-1 17, ASTM D-714, ASTM D-52Z ASTM D-968, ASTM E-96- 93, ASTM D-3359-90, ASTM D-61 0-85.

D. Samples for initial color verification: Submit manufacturer's sample custom color match of Architect’s color sample.

E. Samples for verification: Submit each color and material to be applied on surface to simulate actual field conditions as follows:

1. Twelve inch (12") square samples.

F. Applicator Qualifications

1. Manufacturer's certification or pre-training letter approving of applicator or willingness to train applicator if awarded sub-contract for this anti-graffiti portion of the work.

2. A list of recently completed graffiti resistant coating projects. Supply name and location of project name and telephone number of owner and architect, and a description of products used, substrates, applicable local environmental regulations, and application procedures.

G. Environmental Regulations: Submit certification that products conform to applicable local environmental regulations.

H. Protection Requirements: Submit description of plans for protection barriers of surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation for application, and final cleaning.

I. Maintenance Requirements: Submit manufacturer's instructions for graffiti removal procedures.

1.7 MOCK-UP TEST PANEL
A. Apply base coating and graffiti resistant top coating to test areas to determine number of coats, coverage rates, compatibility, effectiveness, surface preparation, application procedures, and desired results.

B. Apply material to test panels in accordance with manufacturer's written Instructions. Allow 48 hours or until test panels are thoroughly dry before evaluating final appearance and results. Do not begin full-scale application until test panels are reviewed and accepted by the Owner ABS rev.01/09/01 - Rev 04/04/01
C. Test Panel Requirements:

1. Area: Minimum 4 feet by 4 feet.

2. Locations: As determined by Owner

3. Each type of substrate that will be protected

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1419
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ANTI GRAFFITI COATING 09 96 23-4

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator

1. Applicator shall be experienced in coating applications, and shall be currently a Certified Applicator in Good Standing and/or will become certified per the Manufacturer’s training procedures during the project with the graffiti resistant coatings as specified in this section.

B. Pre-Application Meeting: Convene a pre-application meeting before the start of application of graffiti resistant coating. Require attendance of parties directly affecting Work of this Section, Including the General Contractor, Owner, Certified Applicator, and Manufacturer's Representative. Review environmental regulations, test panel procedures, protection of the surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, field quality control, final cleaning, and coordination with other Work.

C. Single Source Responsibility: Same manufacturer will supply base coatings, top coatings and all removal agents.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, bearing manufacturer's name label with the following information:

1. Name of the material.

2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

3. Manufacturer's name.

4. Contents by volume for major pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Application instructions.

6. Color name and number (if applicable).

B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage of coating materials in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

C. Protect from freezing where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove flammable rags and waste daily. Take precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application of coatings.

1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temperature Limitations:

1. Apply water-based coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F and 95 degrees F, unless permitted by paint manufacturer's printed Instructions.

2. Apply solvent-based coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F and 95 degrees F, unless permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions
B. Apply per manufacturer’s Instructions.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1420
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ANTI GRAFFITI COATING 09 96 23-5
C. Do not apply under windy conditions such that base coating and/or graffiti resistant coating may be blown to surfaces not other than those being treated.

D. Do not apply to frozen substrate. Do not apply coatings when ambient temperature is expected to fall below 40 degrees F for 24 hours after application unless surface is protected and heated.

E. Do not apply earlier than 24 hours after rain, snow, fog, or mist if same is predicted for a period of 12 hours after application.

F. This specification, the manufacturer’s specifications, and MSDS sheets are to be on the job site during application. Applicators shall be thoroughly familiar with their content.

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Warranty must be issued by manufacturer prior to final payment to subcontractor.

B. Warranty shall cover the original purchaser or property owner for a period of twenty (20) years from the date of Grand Opening.

C. Manufacturer shall warrant the performance for its products for the warranty period and the removal of graffiti defacement, chemical staining, ghosting, shadowing and normal environmental effects, without exception, and shall retain reasonable gloss and color stability so long as product is applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Warranty shall be issued only upon successful application of the products and verification that products were properly applied by showing successful graffiti removal. Once warranty is issued, manufacturer will bear responsibility for repair, remediation of any substrate and replacement of coatings if there is a failure of the products to protect the substrates and the coatings from damage from graffiti. Manufacturer shall not be responsible for water conditions, structural defects, damage to coatings from external forces, or similar causes.

D. Manufacturer shall warrant that coating will perform as stated herein for the entire warranty period.

E. Surface shall endure unlimited clean-downs with no damage to the coating or substrate.

1.12 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Subcontractor shall provide demonstration of cleaning procedure per manufacturer’s Instructions to tenant’s or property owner’s representative after completion of application and surface has properly cured. Owner will coordinate the meeting.

1.13 MAINTANENCE
A. Extra Products: Furnish the following extra products: Graffiti removal agent -- One and onehalf (1.5) gallons per 2,500 square feet of covered area. GSS TYPICALLY PACKAGES IN A SINGLE CASE – TWELVE 16oz. bottles which equals 1.5 gallons.

1. Removal agent shall be packaged in 16 to 32 oz. bottles and boxed for storage.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1421
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ANTI GRAFFITI COATING 09 96 23-6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Graffiti resistant coating shall be a clear, non-sacrificial graffiti resistant coating which provides protection for exterior vertical surfaces from permanent graffiti staining and damage caused by any type of commercially available spray or other paint, stains, inks, and marking pens. Coating shall be suitable for application to painted and unpainted surfaces including masonry, concrete, metals, and EIFS. Product shall be a coating that dries clear, non-yellowing, non-chalking with a sheen of <5° on the Gardner Gloss Meter for flat finish top coats.

1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following products as manufactured by GSS Coatings, LLC, South Jordan, UT; 801-255-9505. www.gsscoatings.com . or approved equal (any submittals for alternates must be made and approved prior to bid).
a. Base Coat: GSS-307 Base Coat
b. Top Coat: GSS-100 Top Coat or other related top coats depending on required sheen and/or tint.
c. Cleaning Solution: GSS-400 ERASOL Graffiti Cleaning Solution B. Water Repellant (For first coat on unpainted concrete and masonry surfaces): GSS-500 AquaLock WB Water Repellent & Concrete Sealer, as specified in Section 071900.

2.2 MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS
A. Anti-graffiti coatings shall be multi-component, multi-coat coating system. Single component systems are not acceptable.

B. Anti-graffiti coating shall not contain paraffin (wax) or elastomeric silicones.

C. Anti-graffiti coating shall have the capability of having all types of paints and graffiti materials (currently known to the general public) completely removed without damaging the anti-graffiti top coating, the base coating or the substrate.

D. Removal agent shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, biodegradable, and have a pH 7 to 8.5. After removal is complete, no evidence of graffiti shall be present.

E. The removal of graffiti material shall not cause a change in the appearance of the treated surface for the period of the warranty; i.e., there shall be no shadowing, ghosting, or staining of coating or substrate.

F. Color Selection (for pigmented coatings as required):

1. Custom color: Match color sample.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Applicator shall examine areas and conditions under which anti-graffiti coating is to be applied.

Applicator shall notify General Contractor and Owner in writing of conditions detrimental to

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1422
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ANTI GRAFFITI COATING 09 96 23-7
proper and timely completion. Applicator to ensure that any acidic cleaner has been removed and that substrates to be treated are free of contaminants and are pH neutral prior to application of anti-graffiti coatings. Applicator shall not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Commencement of coating work shall be construed as Applicator’s acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area and Applicator’s representation that the surface has been properly treated, cleaned, or repainted.

C. Unpainted Concrete and Masonry: Verify water repellant has been applied in accordance with Section 071900 to new or non-painted concrete and masonry surfaces prior to the application of the anti-graffiti coating.

D. Do not apply over dirt, rust scale, grease, moisture, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable base coating

3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures with coating manufacturer's instruction and as herein specified for each particular substrate condition.

B. Repair, patch, and fill cracks, voids. Defects and damaged areas in surface as approved by the Owner.

C. Allow repair materials to cure completely before application of graffiti resistant coatings.

D. Apply specified sealant and caulking and allow to each cure completely before application of graffiti resistant coatings.

E. Seal all open joints with sealant approved for substrate and acceptable by coatings manufacturer.

F. Allow masonry, concrete construction and repainted surfaces to cure completely before applying graffiti resistant coatings.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply anti-graffiti coating in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use application techniques best suited for substrate and type of material to be applied.

B. Applicator shall know the substrate that is to be coated and understand the porosity, texture, and general conditions that will be present during the application to provide a correct bid and choose correct product acquisition. Applicator responsible for ensuring that correct wet and dry mil thicknesses achieved as per manufacturer’s specifications.

C. Do not dilute anti-graffiti products, materials shall be used direct from the manufacturer's containers.

D. Mix anti-graffiti coatings two-component products at ratio stated by the manufacturer.

E. Applicator shall use caution when spraying coatings. Applicator shall wear a respirator with an organic vapor cartridge. Avoid over-spray and spillage. Mask all windows, move vehicles, cover air intakes, cover vegetation, place barriers to keep pedestrians away from the spraying

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1423
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ANTI GRAFFITI COATING 09 96 23-8
materials. Applicator shall make sure there is adequate ventilation. Applicator should use an air line respirator if ventilation is not adequate.

F. Do not apply in windy conditions.

3.4 APPLICATION RATES
A. Base Coatings:

1. All base coatings require an application of at least two (2) coats on all surfaces. If two (2) coat does not result in a continuous, pin-hole free coating, additional coats must be applied until a pin-hole free surface is achieved.

2. Allow a minimum of 24 hours between base coatings and anti-graffiti top coating.

3. Anti-graffiti top coatings require an application of at least two (2) coat on all surfaces. (With the exception of split face block. Please contact manufacturer.) Dry mil thickness of

3.5-4 anti-graffiti top coating must be achieved per manufacturer’s specifications.

B. Apply at 3.5 - 4.0 mils dry (7.0 - 8.0 mils wet) per coat to achieve optimal performance.

C. Apply coatings in a crosshatch pattern. One vertical pass and one horizontal pass are considered one coat.

D. Back roll base coating when applying to an uneven or textured substrate to achieve a continuous pinhole free surface.

E. Top coating may not require back rolling. Consult with manufacturer.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Inspect the graffiti resistant coatings Work with the General Contractor, Owner, and Applicator and compare with test panel results accepted by the Owner. Subcontractor to comply with manufacturer’s requirements for issuance of warranty.

B. Touch-up Work: Surface areas determined to be un-coated or not consistent with desired finish shall be repaired per manufacturer’s written instruction.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide the services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to verify specified products are used, and protection, surface preparation, and application of graffiti resistant coatings are in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and the test panel results accepted by the Owner.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean site of all unused graffiti resistant coatings, residues, rinse water wastes, and effluent in accordance with environmental regulations.

B. Remove and dispose of all materials used to protect surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, following completion of the Work of this Section.

C. Repair, restore, or replace to the satisfaction of the, all materials, landscaping, and nonmasonry surfaces damaged by exposure to graffiti resistant coatings.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1424
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ANTI GRAFFITI COATING 09 96 23-9
END OF SECTION 09 96 23

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1425
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER 09 97 00-1
SECTION 09 97 00 - CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Provide a complete sealed concrete floor system for the Facilities Building Mechanical Room floor that meets the requirements for specific use indicated in the contract documents. Include all applicable substrate testing, surface preparation, and detail work.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data sheets on each product and system to be used including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements.

3. Installation methods.

4. Maintenance requirements.

C. Selection Samples: For each system specified, provide two samples, representing manufacturer’s full range of colors.

D. Mock Up: For each system specified, provide a 12”x12” mock up of the coating applied to the specified substrate.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All materials used on the stained concrete floor system shall be manufactured and provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility and proper bonding.

B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this section.

C. Contractor shall have a minimum of 3 years experience installing concrete floor coatings similar to that which is required for this project and who is acceptable to the manufacturer.

1. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation.

2. Contractor must show and have QCA Qualified Contractor/Applicator paperwork from the manufacturer of the coating system.

D. Convene a pre-application meeting before the start of application of coating system. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including: Architect, contractor, applicator, and authorized representative of the coating system manufacturer and interfacing trades. Review the following:

1. Drawings and specifications affecting work of this section.

2. Protection of adjacent surfaces.

3. Surface preparation and substrate conditions.

4. Application.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1426
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER 09 97 00-2

5. Field quality control.

6. Cleaning.

7. Protection of coating system.

8. Repair of coating system.

9. Coordination with other work.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Delivery: Materials shall be delivered to the job site in sealed, undamaged containers. Each container shall be clearly marked with manufacturer’s label showing type of material, color, and lot number.

B. Storage: Store all materials in a clean, dry place with a temperature range in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
C. Handling: Handle products carefully to avoid damage to the containers. Read all labels and Material Safety Data Sheets prior to use.

1.06 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within the limits recommended by the manufacturer.

B. All concrete should be tested for moisture before applying a seamless coating. If moisture emissions exceed 5 lbs/1000 square feet (ASTM F1869) or if the relative humidity (RH) exceeds 75% (ASTM F2170), contact the manufacturer before application.

C. Concrete must be at least 2500 psi.

D. Concrete must be cured for a minimum of 28 days before coating is applied E. Schedule coating work to avoid excessive dust and airborne contaminates. Protect work areas from excessive dust and airborne contaminates during coating application.

F. Before any work is started, the applicator shall examine all surfaces for any deficiencies.

Should any deficiencies exist, the architect, owner or general contractor shall be notified in writing and any corrections necessary shall be made.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturer: Westcoat Specialty Coatings; 4007 Lockridge Street, San Diego, CA 92102. Telephone 800-250-4519. Fax 619-262-8606. Website: www.westcoat.com or equal.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. As basis of design Westcoat 11-10 System, or equal. A process of preparing exterior concrete and water-based sealer.

2.03 COMPONENTS
A. 11-10 System: Acrylic concrete color and seal.

1. Primer: EC-11 Water Based Epoxy 500 to 800 square feet per gallon.

2. Topcoat: SC-10 Acrylic 200-400 square feet per gallon.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1427
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER 09 97 00-3

2.04 LOCATION
A. Provide at the following locations:

1. Facilities Building Mechanical Room exposed concrete.

2.05 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions: See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions.

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Supplemental Materials:

1. Patching materials shall be TC-29 Concrete Patch

2. Concrete repairs can be made with TC-23 Mortar Mix as needed.

3. Optional aggregate shall be CA-30 Small Safe Grip, CA-31 Large Safe Grip, or other sand designed to meet the owners skid resistance requirements.

Optional Topcoats:

4. SC-65G WB Gloss Polyurethane may be used OVER the SC-10 when a low odor, solvent free, mar and chemical/UV resistant gloss finish is required.

5. SC-65SG Pigmented WB Semi-Gloss Polyurethane may be used IN LIEU of the SC-10 when a low odor, solvent free, mar and chemical resistant semi-gloss finish is required.

6. SC-65F WB Flat Polyurethane may be used OVER the SC-65G Gloss or SC-65SG SemiGloss when low odor, solvent free, mar and chemical resistant flat finish is required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions.

1. Inspect all surfaces to receive stained concrete flooring. Concrete must be clean, dry and free of grease, paint, oil, dust, curing agents, laitance or any foreign material that will prevent proper adhesion.

2. Before starting work, report in writing to the authority having jurisdiction any unsatisfactory conditions.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

B. Create a surface profile by mechanically diamond grinding the surface with 60-80 grit tools to achieve a clean uniform surface. Additional tooling or passes may required.

C. Sweep and vacuum surfaces entirely prior to installation.

D. Rout and clean moving cracks and joints: patch with manufacturer’s recommended concrete patch material.

E. Repair any non-moving surface deviations with manufacturer’s recommended patching material.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install coatings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Mix multi-component materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1428
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER 09 97 00-4
C. Use application equipment, tools, and techniques in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Uniformly apply coatings at spread rates and in number of coats to achieve specified coverage rates recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Broadcast aggregates in accordance with the specified system and manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Adhere to all limitations, instructions, and cautions for stained concrete floor coating as stated in the manufacturer’s published literature.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify coatings and other materials are as specified.

B. Verify coverages of the system as work progresses. Areas found not to meet the required coverage rates shall receive additional material until specified coverage is attained.

C. Manufacturer’s representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for surface preparation and application of coating systems.

3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP
A. Installation areas must be kept free from traffic and other trades during the application procedure and cure time.

B. Protect finished surfaces of coating system from damage during construction.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged flooring system after substantial completion.

D. Clean area and remove all debris upon completion of work. Dispose of empty containers properly according to current Local, State and Federal regulations.

3.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall provide to owner, maintenance and cleaning instructions for the floor system upon completion of work. Owner is required to clean and maintain the surfaces to maintain manufacture’s warranty.

END OF SECTION 09 97 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1429
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST METAL LETTERS 10 14 00-1
SECTION 10 14 00 – CAST METAL LETTERS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 INCLUDES
A. Cast Bronze Letters

1.2 SCOPE
A. Furnish letters and hardware necessary to install cast metal letters shown on drawings and herein specified.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: Follow procedures outlined in Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Contractor shall submit two full scale letters (one cast bronze, one cast aluminum) to confirm size and finish for Owner and Architect review.

C. Contractor shall submit shop drawing layout showing cast letter dimensions and spacing in relation to tile layout.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer to have a minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing letters.

B. All letters to be manufactured by one manufacturer.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Impact Architectural Signs
26 E Burlington Ave
LaGrange, IL 60525
(708) 469-7178
[email protected]
B. Follow Substitution procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions (GP 4.20).

2.2 MATERIALS (Metal Alloys)
A. Cast Bronze – NAVY G 88-8-0-4 lead and mercury free
B. [ALT] Cast Aluminum – Orbital Random

2.3 FINISHES
A. Cast Bronze

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1430
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST METAL LETTERS 10 14 00-2

1. Natural satin stroke sanded face, bead-blasted return, 2-part hardened acrylic polyurethane clear coat
B. Cast Aluminum [ALT]

1. Orbital Random finish.

2.4 THICKNESS
A. Varies based on letter height between ⅜” and 1.5” deep

2.5 FONT STYLES
A. “HELVETICA”

2.6 MOUNTING HARDWARE
A. cast metal letters are tapped for threaded stud insertion.

B. Double Rail Mount
C. Bottom Rail mount
D. Spacers can be used to “float” letters from wall. From .25” to 2” deep E. Paper Installation template with marked stud locations should be provided.

2.7 FABRICATION
A. Letters shall be made of cast bronze or cast aluminum as decided by Owner and Architect based on submittal review.

B. Letter shall be “HELVETICA” font, capital letter style and shall be 12” inches high, as indicated on the drawings.

C. Finish shall be brushed satin.

D. Mounting shall be standard stud and a mounting template designating stud locations is required for mounting on a porcelain surface over metal stud wall.

Part 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. A qualified installer shall install cast metal letters.

B. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

3.2 WARRANTY
A. Letters should be guaranteed for the life of the business against defects.

END OF SECTION 10 14 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1431
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set RESTROOM ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-1
SECTION 10 28 00 – RESTROOM ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. New toilet accessories, and installation of accessories at Restroom, complete, as specified and indicated on the Drawings, including attachment hardware.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Masonry Unit

2. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry

3. Section 09 22 16 -- Non-Structural Cold-Formed Metal Framing.

4. Section 09 30 00 -- Tiling

5. Section 22 41 00 – Plumbing Fixtures.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Grab Bar Performance Requirement: Comply with ASTM International (ASTM) F446 - "Grab Bars and Accessories Installed in the Bathing Area", except capable of supporting a vertical load of 400 pounds and a horizontal load of 200 pounds applied to the bar.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals..

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with 2019 California Building Code, Section 1115B "Bathing and Toilet Facilities", for installing work in conformance with accessibility standards.

2. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design".

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Provide accessories manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Accessories, Bradley, ASI, Koala Kare, Vandal Stop or equal.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1432
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set RESTROOM ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-2

2.2 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 304, with No. 4 satin finish.

1. Recycled Content: Minimum 30 percent post-consumer recycled content.

B. Exposed Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, satin finish, tamperproof.

C. Concealed Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel.

D. Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone, as specified in Section 07 92 00.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.

B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

C. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

D. Keying: Key all accessories alike; key all coin mechanisms alike but different from accessories. Provide three keys for accessories and three keys for coin mechanisms to Owner.

2.4 FINISHES
A. Exposed Metal: AISI Type 304 stainless steel, with #4 satin finish, unless otherwise noted.

B. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 or A386 to 1.25-ounce/sq.ft.

C. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for incorporating into construction. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories at heights and locations in accordance with accessibility standards.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1433
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set RESTROOM ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-3
B. Install accessories and items securely fastened to backing plates and blocking in wall or partition, in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions. Anchorage from gypsum /cementitious board with Molly bolts or similar devices not acceptable.

C. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

3.4 CLEAN AND REPAIR
A. Repair or replace units which are damaged as acceptable to the Architect.

B. Clean accessories prior to acceptance of the Project.

3.5 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES – RESTROOM (SEE SCHEDULE SHEET A2-802) A. Baby Diaper Changing Station: Meeting ASTM F2285 and the following; surface- mounted, high density polyethylene plastic, designed to withstand a 250 pound live load in the open position, steel to steel hinge, with pneumatic air pump for controlled lowering and retraction of the changing bed, safety straps, and integral sanitary liner dispenser; Koala Kare Products KB310- SSWM, American Infant Care Products Inc. "Diaper Deck", Foundations Worldwide Inc., or equal.

B. Universal Changing Table: Koala Kare Products KB3000-AHL.Supplied with required info sign.

C. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Surface mounted multi-roll toilet tissue dispenser, 316 stainless steel; Vandal Stop “Vandal Resistant Three Roll Horizontal Toilet Paper Holder with Full Shroud Model #VSP-OFUx3”, or equal.

D. Grab Bars: 1-1/2-inch diameter 316 stainless steel grab bars, concealed mounting, satin finish, snap-flange cover plate; Bobrick B-6806 Series, Bradley, or equal. Provide in sizes indicated on Drawings.

E. Soap Dispenser: Surface mounted; OPS “Surface-mounted Soap Dispenser”, Model 1015-01G F. Waste Receptacle: Recessed; Bobrick “Recessed Waste Receptacle with Disposal Door”, Model #B-35633.

G. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: Surface mounted; Vandal Stop "Heavy Duty Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser”, Model #VSP-TSCD.

H. Sanitary Waste Receptacle: Surface mounted; Vandal Stop “Vandal Resistant Sanitary Waste Receptacle”, Model #VSP-SWR-316L-12g.

I. Coat Hook: Bobrick Stainless Steel Coat Hook B9542
J. Hand Dryer: Dyson Air “Wall Mounted Hand Dryer”, Model Airblade V.

K. Utility Shelf: Vandal Stop 32” wide by 8” deep Stainless Steel utility shelf. AA-VRS-0816-304L12g L. Evogen: Coin Free Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Dispenser.

H. Mop and Broom Holder: Not used.

I. Paper Towel Dispenser: Not used.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1434
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set RESTROOM ACCESSORIES 10 28 00-4
J. Framed Wall Mirror at Lavatory: Not used.

L. Open-Bottom Lavatory Plumbing Insulation: Molded closed-cell vinyl cover pipe wrap with nylon fasteners; anti-fungal, anti-microbial, meeting ADA requirements; for sink drain pipe, and hot and cold water supply lines and stops; Truebro Inc. "Lav-Guard 2", Plumberex "Pro-2000", or equal.

END OF SECTION 10 28 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1435
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING
22 00 00-1
SECTION 22 00 00 - PLUMBING
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
A. The work under this section includes everything necessary for or incidental to completing plumbing and piping work except as herein specifically excluded.

B. Work Included: Principal items of work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. New cold-water and or hot-water piping to all plumbing fixtures and equipment requiring water.

3. New sanitary waste and vent system.

4. Trenching and backfilling for plumbing work.

5. Rough-in for and connections to equipment furnished under other sections.

6. Plumbing fixtures.

7. Floor drains, janitor sink, and hose bibs.

8. Identification of all piping with direction of flow.

9. Identification of all valves with function and direction.

10. Rain water leaders and drain piping.

C. Work Not Included in This Section:

1. Landscape irrigation.

2. Field installed bathroom accessories.

3. Sheet metal ductwork or fans.

4. Fire sprinklers.

5. Fire service, yard main fire hydrants, and yard hydrants.

6. Site utilities beyond connection point.

D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Includes:

1. Painting.

2. Electrical line voltage wiring and connection to equipment.

3. Landscape irrigation system.

4. Automatic fire sprinkler system.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All work shall be in strict accordance with the latest applicable code and ordinances.

1.3 FEES AND PERMITS
A. Contractors shall procure and pay for all permits and licenses required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Installation of piping in this section shall be in compliance to all latest applicable code requirements.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1436
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING
22 00 00-2
B. Materials shall be clearly marked or stamped with manufacturer's stamp and rating, and shall be of domestic manufacture.

C. Pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings and fixtures intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption through drinking water or cooking shall be AB1953 compliant. This includes, but not limited to, faucets, valves, and any end-use devices intended for drinking or cooking water dispensary.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Valves: Nibco, Hammond

1. Gate valves: 2" and smaller Nibco S-180, ring gate valve. 2-1/2" and 3" Nibco T-113. 4" and larger T-169 iron body bronze trim.

2. Globe: Nibco S-23Y with Teflon plunger, 2" and smaller. Nibco S-211; 2-1/2" and larger or ball valves.

3. Ball Valves: Nibco 580 series two piece bronze. At contractor’s option can be used in lieu of gate valves for valves 1-1/2" and smaller.

B. Dielectric protection: Provide insulated couplings and/or unions at points of connection between copper, steel and brass piping, EPCO or equal.

C. Sound Control: All water piping systems and drainage piping systems, including supply, waste and drain shall be installed with vibration isolators and shall be isolated from any structural members, wall sections or other materials that could transmit sound to the occupied areas. All hangers, straps, brackets, and supports shall have acoustical components or combined neoprene and plastic form by Acousto-Plumb® System, division of Specialty Products of LSP Products Group to isolate complete pipe contact area. All isolation material shall have a minimum thickness of ½". Install all components as per manufacturer's instructions.

2.3 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. CICPI 301, hubless, service weight.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.

2. Joints: Neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp- and-shield assemblies

2.4 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.

2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.

B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B306, DWV.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, cast bronze, or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper.

2. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 50B.

2.5 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1437
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING
22 00 00-3
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed.

1. Fittings: Brazed.

2. Joints: Brazed.

2.6 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88 Type L, hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper.

2. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

2.7 FLANGES, UNIONS AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe size 2 inches and under: 150 psig bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints.

B. Pipe size over 2 inches: 150 psig bronze flanges for copper piping.

C. Dielectric connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.

2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturer: Superstrut, Grinnel, or approved equal. Screws shall be used in wood construction, concrete inserts in concrete construction.

B. Cast iron and screwed ferrous pipe: Horizontal runs shall be supported by individually adjustable hangers, wrought straps, U-Hooks or single hooks as applicable.

C. Copper Tubing: Support similarly to screwed pipe except that supports and hangers shall be copper or copper plated type especially for copper tubing.

D. Trapeze Hangers: Steel members as required; when used with copper tubing, a layer of 15 lb. asphalt felt shall be placed between copper and ferrous material.

2.9 DRAINS
A. Manufacturer: Smith, Zurn, Wade or Josam or ACO Channel Drains.

2.10 CLEANOUTS
A. Install where required by ordinances, where shown on the drawings, and in the following locations; at ends of house drains, at all changes in directions, in all straight runs at 100 foot intervals, where horizontal mains change size, and at all ends of all branch pipes which are 5' or over in length.

B. Manufacturer: Smith, Zurn, Wade or Josam.

C. Grade Cleanouts: Cast iron body, same size as line served. Set flush in finish pavement or 18" square X 4" thick concrete anchor pad, flush with grade.

2.11 SLEEVES AND WALL PLATES

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1438
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING
22 00 00-4
A. Service Pipe Through Exterior Walls and Ceilings: Water-tight cast iron caulking sleeves, Smith 1720 or equal.

B. Pipe Through Interior Walls and Ceilings: Provide with wall and ceiling plates, Crane Style BC or equal. Plates in finished rooms shall be chrome plated.

C. Pipe Under or Through Footings: 18 gauge iron sleeves, cast in concrete, two diameters larger than the pipe and the annular space filled with mastic or plastic bituminous cement or LINKSEAL.

2.12 HOT WATER PIPING INSULATION (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Manufacturer: Certainteed, Manville or Owens-Corning Fiberglass unless otherwise noted.

Installation to be in accordance with manufacturer's method and installation procedures.

Formaldehyde-free insulation.

B. 500 Degrees "Snap on" or approved equal sectional pipe covering, 1" thick with factory applied all service jacket and joint sealed with ASJ butt strips. Fittings shall be insulated with "Snap From" PVC covered insulation system.

C. 1" Therma-Cel Pipe insulation or other preformed elastomeric cellular thermal installation acceptable.

D. All material shall meet flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.

E. In accordance with Title 24, insulate all hot water supply piping including all branches.

2.13 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide, where required, for valves and other concealed equipment, complete with frames.

2.14 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Plumbing fixtures shall be complete with all accessories required for a complete installation.

Fixture and trim numbers indicated represent a type and quality only. Substitution of equal or greater quality may be permitted in accordance with the requirements of the general conditions and as approved by the Architect.

B. Selection of faucets and fittings shall avoid the type with potential for lead contamination.

C. Install chrome-plated escutcheons on all pipes through walls, ceilings or floor.

D. Install stop valves on, hot (where applicable) and cold water supplies to each fixture.

E. Make sink/lavatory trap and waste line adaptable to adjustment with only the replacement of the drain tailpipe. Tempered, hot (where applicable) and cold water supply tubes shall be configured so that their length may be changed without modifying the slip joints.

F. Water closets and urinals shall be wall mounted and stainless steel.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1439
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING
22 00 00-5

2.15 CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A. Rough-in and connect equipment furnished under this Section. Furnish and install pipes, stops, traps, and all other items required where not supplied with unit.

2.16 FLASHING
A. All pipes passing through the roof shall be flashed and counter flashed with 22 gauge sheet metal. Flashing shall extend a minimum of 8 inches around the base and counter flashing shall be made watertight.

2.17 HOSE BIBS
A. Provide lockable hose bibs as shown on the plans and called out in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule with three (3) sets of loose keys to be supplied to Owner upon completion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SERVICES
A. Materials, methods and locations of service mains connecting the new construction to all new and existing services shall be in strict accordance with rules, regulations, codes and requirements of all agencies having jurisdiction over this installation. Check connections to existing work in order that the extension may be done as indicated on the drawings but before starting any other work. Locate and excavate all existing buried stubs to be connected to in this contract before excavation of trenches is started. Coordinate location of water and sewer connections with other trades.

3.2 PLUMBING FIXTURE
A. Contractor shall install all plumbing fixtures and trim as shown on the architectural plans and as herein specified. Rough-in for all fixtures shall be exactly to measurements furnished by fixture manufacturer. All exposed parts to be chromium plated unless specified otherwise.

B. Caulk airtight all plumbing penetrations in sound rated walls and floor/ceilings. Seal penetrations of concrete floors with cement grout. Minimize penetrations through sound rated construction.

C. Keep rough-in cuts within the plate lines and do not cut completely through plates in soundrated walls. Drill or saw neat round holes for all piping. Size approximately ½ inch larger than the pipe diameter.

D. Provide aeration devices on all lavatories and kitchen sink faucets.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Pipe lines shall be installed free from traps and air pockets and true to line and grade with suitable supports properly spaced. Piping shall be installed without undue stresses and with provision for expansion and contractions.

1. Vertical lines shall be braced and supported at every floor level.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1440
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING
22 00 00-6

2. Horizontal lines shall have hangers or supports spaced as follows:
a. Cast iron pipe - 5' centers
b. Copper tubing - 5' centers for 1-1/2" and smaller, 10' centers for 2" and larger.

3. Below-Grade Piping: Support on a firm bed for the entire length. Minimum depth of cover shall be 2'0" unless noted otherwise.

B. Piping shall be new and free from foreign substances. Ream out all burrs formed in cutting pipe. Threads shall be cut accurately and not over two threads shall show beyond the fitting.

Friction wrenches shall be used with plated, polished, or soft metal piping.

C. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings, and bushing will not be permitted.

D. Union connection shall be installed downstream of all valves, at all equipment connections and at other points as required.

E. Valves shall be accessible and shall not be installed with stems below horizontal plane.

Exterior valves shall be provided with cast iron or concrete valve boxes with identification permanently marked on cover.

F. Cutting or boring of holes through joists or structural members shall be done only when it is impossible to route piping in another manner. If cutting or boring is necessary it shall be accomplished only by written approval from the Architect.

G. Exposed pipe passing through walls, floors and ceilings shall be fitted with wall plates securely held in position and large enough to cover opening around pipe. Plates in exposed areas shall be chromium plated. Pipe passing through concrete or masonry shall be provided with pip sleeves.

H. Provide access doors for all concealed valves and cleanouts.

I. Insulate trap, cold, hot and tempered water supply trim on all lavatories with Truebro LAV Guard 2 protective devices by IPS Corporation, or equal.

J. All domestic water piping systems and all waste and drain piping must be vibration isolated from the structure.

K. Water supply lines 1 inch or less in diameter should be isolated from the structure using the entire system of Acousto-Plumb® System, division of Specialty Products of LSP Products Group. All other supply lines and all drain and waste lines should be isolated using ½ inch thick felt pads or rubber sleeves isolation hanger by Stonemane. Use ½ inch thick 40- durometer neoprene waffle pads under all riser clamps (e.g., Mason Industries).

L. Do not allow the piping, valves or connectors to form a rigid connection with the structure or other pipes.

M. Provide Josam "Absorbotron" or equal water hammer arrestors in supply lines connected to fixtures.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1441
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING
22 00 00-7
N. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints or connected equipment.

O. All valves installed by this section shall be of the same manufacturer. Valves, strainers cocks, etc., shall be the same size as the pipes in which they are installed, unless otherwise indicated.

P. Fixture vents may be connected to the main vent at a point 1-foot above the highest fixture and not less than 3'-6" above the floor. While work is in progress, plug or cap all openings in plumbing work.

Q. Provide sound control on all water piping not installed in the ground.

R. Install dielectric couplings whenever a non-ferrous pipe connects to a ferrous pipe or piece of equipment.

3.4 DRAINAGE, WASTE AND VENT PIPING
A. Interior drainage, waste, and vent lines shall be installed to a uniform grade of 1/4" per foot minimum. Vent piping shall be graded so that all condensation shall flow directly to a drainage or waste lines.

B. Exterior soil and waste lines shall be installed to inverts or grades to suit field conditions and to ensure not less than 2 feet of cover.

3.5 DOMESTIC HOT (where applicable) AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS A. Di-electric unions shall be installed where copper pipe is connected to ferrous metal piping or stubs.

B. Connections from copper pipe to fixture supply fittings shall be made with copper or brass pipe nipples.

3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Provide all excavations and backfill necessary for this installation. Restore existing concrete and paved surfaces damaged or cut due to plumbing work. Such work shall be acceptable to the Architect and local authorities.

B. Excavate trenches for pipe lines to required depth, tamp bottoms hard and grade to the required slope. Excavate holes for bells to permit pipe to rest on solid ground.

3.7 STERILIZATION OF WATER PIPING
A. The domestic water supply and distribution system within the building shall be sterilized with chlorine in solution in accordance with American Water Works Association Publication C651.

B. Open and close all valves several times during the period, the flush out the system until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 PPM.

C. All work and certification of performance shall be done by approved applicators or qualified personnel with chemical and laboratory experience. Submit a certificate of sterilization.

3.8 TEST
A. Pressure test entire hot and cold piping and drainage system from capped connections, to and including vents above roof.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1442
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING
22 00 00-8

1. Furnish the necessary materials, test pumps, gauges and labor required for testing.

2. System shall be tested in accordance with the following schedule without pressure loss not visible leaks within four (4) hours duration:

3.Any test valves shall be removed at no cost to the Owner. No test valves shall be left or any water or other lines in walls and covered.

3.9 OPERATION
A. After completion, operate the different systems and equipment under their normal working conditions.

B. Should any piece of apparatus or any material or work fail in any of these tests, immediately remove and replace with new materials and test the portion of the work replaced.

END OF SECTION 22 00 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1443
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS 22 08 13-1
SECTION 22 08 13 - TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pressure testing of the following systems:

1. Plumbing piping (sewer lines, water lines, rainwater lines)

2. Holiday testing (buried coated steel piping)

1.2 SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Notify City at least 48 hours (2 working days) in advance to arrange for witnessing of the piping test.

B. For discharge requirements of water used for pressure testing comply with Water Discharge Requirements.

C. Notify City immediately in the event of any accidental discharge.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions (GP 4.19).

1. Pneumatic/hydronic test plan for approval that includes:
a. Material of construction
b. Design pressure
c. Test pressure and duration of test
d. Test medium and method of achieving the test pressure e. Certification on calibration of pressure gauges
f. Method to exclude personnel from the area containing the system to be tested. g. Over pressurization protection/prevention: Device make/model number, certification, pressure relief set point, point of installation in system. h. Test Reports: Submit test results within 10 working days of successful test.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Furnish instruments, equipment, material and labor necessary to conduct tests.

B. Calibrate testing equipment at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

C. Test gauges used in conducting test shall be in accordance with IAPMO UPC.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1444
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS 22 08 13-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. All piping systems installed shall be tested in accordance with this section.

B. No testing procedure here shall be considered in lieu of any more stringent code requirements.

C. Piping being tested shall remain exposed until owners representative has approved the piping test results.

D. Trenches may be backfilled between joints before testing to prevent movement of pipe during testing. Ensure that thrust blocks are sufficiently hardened before testing.

E. Piping being tested shall not leak nor show any loss in test pressure for duration specified unless otherwise noted.

F. Where portion of piping system is to be concealed before completion, the portion shall be tested separately as specified for the entire system.

G. Ensure piping supports are in place.

H. Isolate system gages, sensors, etc., from pressure tests so instruments and devices are not damaged. Test pressure shall not exceed the maximum allowable test pressure for any vessel, pump, valves, or other component in the system.

I. Hydrostatic (Water) Testing:

1. Use potable water as test medium. Do not fill system until the City has approved the source of water supply.

2. Provide vents at high points to release trapped air while filling system.

3. Provide drains at low points for complete removal of test liquid.

4. Drain system if there is a potential for freezing, i.e., no heat in building, coil in outside air stream, or other similar situations.

5. Pressurization of system for a period prior to test is recommended for hydronic loops utilizing plastic tubing, for example PEX radiant tubing, to prevent test failure from slight expansion of material upon first pressurization.

J. Pneumatic (Air) Testing:

1. Use clean dry air (Excluded from use with natural gas pipe testing) or inert gas as the test medium.

2. Barricade the area around the system to be tested.

3. Prior to application of full air test pressure, apply a preliminary test of not more than 10 psig to reveal possible major leaks.

4. After preliminary test, raise pressure in stages not more than 25 percent up to full test pressure, allowing at least 10 minutes for equalization of strain and detection of major leaks at each intermediate stage. Hold final test pressure for time specified.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1445
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS 22 08 13-3

5. Examine piping for leakage using soap bubble solution, or by test gage monitoring.

K. If leaks are found, they shall be eliminated by tightening, approved repair method, or replacement, as appropriate and test repeated until no leakage is found.

3.2 PRESSURE TESTING
A. Fire Protection Piping:

1. Below Grade: Test with water at 200 psig for 2 hours. Piping shall maintain test pressure +/- 5 psi for the duration of the test and there shall be no visible signs of leakage per NFPA 24.

2. Above Grade: Test with water at 200 psig for 2 hours and shall maintain that pressure without loss per NFPA 13 and FM Global requirements.

B. Plumbing Piping:

1. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Within Building to Building Wall, including condensate drain line from cooling coils:
a. Test with water in accordance with the IAPMO CPC to a minimum of 10 foot head of water. Keep water in system for at least 1 hour before inspection starts.
b. Acceptable Alternate: Test with air at 5 psig and hold pressure for at least 1 hour; note: This alternative method may not be used for plastic piping, c. For modifications to existing plug the outlet of the drain piping, and fill pipe with water to the point of overflow. After 15 minutes, check piping for leaks. No loss of water from the piping for the duration of the test indicates that the system meets the requirements of the project. (Per CPC)

2. Sanitary Sewer Piping Beyond Building Wall (other than Force Main): Completely fill system with water and let stand for at least 1 hour before inspection starts, then visually inspect to ensure that all joints are tight.
a. For partial system tests, test with water in accordance with the IAPMO CPC to a minimum of 10 foot head of water. Keep water in system for at least 1 hour before inspection starts.
b. Acceptable Alternate: Test with air at 5 psig and hold pressure for at least 1 hour
1) Note: This alternative testing method may not be used for plastic piping.

3. Sanitary Sewer Force Main: Test with water at 1.5 times operating pressure, 25 psig minimum for 4 hour.

4. Potable Water Inside Building to Site Main: Test with water at 1.5 times operating pressure, 100 psig minimum for 4 hours.

5. Hydronic piping test
a. Test Preparation:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1446
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS 22 08 13-4
1) Temporarily restrain expansion joints so they are not damaged due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
2) Flush with clean water, and clean strainers.
3) Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure.
b. Tests:
1) Subject piping to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure but not more than 100 psig.
2) After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
3) Pipe pressure shall maintain its test pressure for a period of no less than 24 hours before testing can be terminated as successful. 4) Prepare a written report of testing.

6. Hydronic Piping (heating hot water, chilled water, make-up water and equipment drains): Test with water at [ 1.5 times operating pressure, 100 psig minimum ] for 4 hours.
a. For modifications to existing piping bring system up to operating pressure gradually. Visually examine the piping for leaks at one-half the system operating pressure. Perform a final examination at the system operating pressure. No leaking from the piping indicates that the system meets the requirement of the project. Per ASME 31.9, Chapter VI, Section 937.5.

3.3 Testing for Holidays:

A. Test the following buried coated steel piping systems for holidays:

1. Perform holiday test in accordance with the following procedure:
a. After pipe has been welded, joints wrapped, and pipe is ready for lowering into trench, test coating for flaws (holidays). Test coated piping system throughout its length for flaws in coating system by means of a high-potential flaw detector that can impress a maximum of [8,000] volts across coating. One electrode of tester shall maintain complete circumferential contact with coating while transversing entire length of coating system and other electrode shall be the underlying metal pipe. An electrical discharge through coating detected visually or by instrument, shall constitute failure of this test. 1) Important! Do not cut ground cable to a shorter length. The length supplied is important to proper operation of the detector. Keep as much of the cable as possible in contact with the earth. Straighten out kinks where possible and do not let it ride up over skids. In dry areas it will help to drag the cable in the ditch where there is more moisture.

The pipe should be grounded.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1447
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS 22 08 13-5
b. Mark holidays as they are found and repair prior to lowering pipe into trench.

Repair holidays in factory coating by removing initial coating and undercoating for a minimum of 4 inches on each side of holiday. Remove coating around holiday and feather edge to pipe wall for sufficient distance to make a satisfactory repair. Apply primer (Polyken 1027) to the holiday to form a bond over the entire surface of the holiday and then spirally wrap pipe with a double layer of half-lapped 35 mil polyethylene tape (Polyken 934) for a minimum of 2 inches on each side of the holiday.
1) Repair holidays in joint wrappings by removing field applied coating in area of holiday and rewrapping. Owner or designated representative will approve all areas of joint coating.

3.4 RETESTING
A. If piping does not pass test, locate and repair leaks and repeat testing procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.

1. Make repairs to piping with new materials. Caulking on screwed joints, cracks, or holes is not acceptable.

END OF SECTION 22 08 13

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1448
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-1
SECTION 22 10 05 - PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.

1. Sanitary sewer.

2. Domestic water.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 20 00 - Excavation.

B. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching.

C. Section 33 10 00 - Site Water Lines.

D. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.

E. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Panels.

F. Section 09 91 00 - Painting.

G. Section 22 00 00 - Plumbing (General Requirements)

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2018 (ANSI B16.18).

B. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2021.

C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2020 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

D. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2021.

E. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2020.

F. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2020.

G. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2020.

H. ASTM D2239 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter; 2021.

I. ASTM D2447 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter; 2003.

J. ASTM D2609 - Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe; 2021.

K. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2018.

L. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2020

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1449
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-2
M. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; Latest issue shall apply.

N. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; Latest issue shall apply.

O. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2018.

P. MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2018.

Q. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2019.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

C. Operation and maintenance data.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details.

G. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of California, standards.

1. Maintain one copy on project site.

B. All piping shall me manufactured in the United States of America.

C. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

D. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations.

E. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME (BPV IX).

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1450
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-3
F. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating.

G. Sanitary, Waste and Vent Piping

1. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

2. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

H. Domestic Water Piping

1. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

2. Comply with NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances," and NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for combined fire-protection and domestic water service piping to building.

3. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.

I. Hangers and Supports

1. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

2. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of California plumbing code.

B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.

C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1451
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-4

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe

1. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or receive prior approval of the engineer.

2. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of America.

3. Manufacturers:
a. AB&I Foundry
b. Charlotte Pipe
c. Tyler Pipe

4. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight.
a. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-resistant metal band on each end. b. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. c. Hub-and-Spigot Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. 1) Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

5. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301, hubless.
a. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
b. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies.
c. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 1) Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve. (a) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands. 2) Heavy-Duty, FMG-Approved Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel housing; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve. (a) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide housing with 2 bands.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1452
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-5
3) Heavy-Duty, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48, 2-piece, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and sleeve.
4) Heavy-Duty, Type 301, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve. (a) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands. 5) Compact, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310 with ASTM A 167, Type 301, or ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
(a) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8-inch- wide shield with 2 bands.

2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe

1. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or receive prior approval of the engineer.

2. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of America.

3. Manufacturers:
a. AB&I Foundry
b. Charlotte Pipe
c. Tyler Pipe

4. Hub-and-Spigot Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. a. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

5. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301, hubless.
a. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
b. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies.
c. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 1) Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve. (a) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands. 2) Heavy-Duty, FMG-Approved Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel housing; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve. (a) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide housing with 2 bands. 3) Heavy-Duty, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48, 2-piece, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and sleeve.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1453
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-6
4) Heavy-Duty, Type 301, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve. (a) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands. 5) Compact, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310 with ASTM A 167, Type 301, or ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
(a) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8-inch- wide shield with 2 bands.

2.3 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.

2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.

B. HDPE Pipe: ASTM D2239, or ASTM D2447 Schedule 40.

1. Fittings: ASTM D2609, HDPE.

2. Joints: Mechanical with stainless steel clamp.

2.4 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H).

1. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

2. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper. a. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
b. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.
c. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

3. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper. a. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
b. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1454
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-7
c. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.5 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:

1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.

2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.

B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:

1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; (a) preformed neoprene gaskets.

2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.

C. Dielectric Fittings

1. Dielectric fittings shall be brass nipples a minimum of 6" in length or 6 times the pipe diameter, whichever is longer.

2.6 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.

1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.

2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers.

3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.

4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.

B. MANUFACTURED UNITS

1. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Grinnell Corp.
2) Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
3) Or equal.
b. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
c. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1455
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-8

2. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. a. Manufacturers:
1) Grinnell Corp.
2) Unistrut Corp.
3) Or equal.
b. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
c. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
2) Pipe Shields, Inc.
3) Or equal.
b. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
c. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. d. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.
e. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. f. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

C. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

1. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

3. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, low-VOC, hydraulic-cement grout.
a. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications.
b. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. c. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1456
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-9
D. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:

1. Refer to Division 23 for seismic-restraint devices.

2. Install the following:
a. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
b. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
1) 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 2) Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. 3) Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
c. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
d. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

3. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

4. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

5. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
a. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
b. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
c. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
d. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches.

6. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

7. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
a. NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
b. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
c. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.
d. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
e. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
f. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

8. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

9. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
a. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
b. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1457
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-10
c. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
d. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

10. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

11. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Plumbing Piping - Water:

1. Conform to ASME B31.9.

2.7 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com.

2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.

3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union.

2.8 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.

2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.

3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Up to 2 Inches:

1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder ends.

C. Over 2 Inches:

1. MSS SP-71, Class 125, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc seal and seat, flanged or grooved ends.

2.9 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.

2. Crane Co.: www.cranevalve.com.

3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N seals, wafer style ends.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1458
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-11

2.10 STRAINERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.

2. Green Country Filter Manufacturing; www.greencountryfilter.com.

3. WEAMCO: www.weamco.com.

4. Substitutions: See Division 1 - Substitution Procedures.

B. Size 2 inch and Under:

1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

2. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

C. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch:

1. Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

2.11 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Valve Actuators:

1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

2. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.

D. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.

E. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

F. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.12 Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

A. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.

B. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1459
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-12
C. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flangeless or single-flange, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner.

D. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, horizontal or vertical, bronze.

E. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze.

F. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron.

G. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 125 minimum.

H. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I or II, Class 125, cast iron.

2.13 Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following types of valves:

A. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.

B. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.

C. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 3, Class 125, bronze.

D. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I or II, Class 125, gray iron.

2.14 Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:

A. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide valves with threaded ends for condenser water, heating hot water, steam, and steam condensate services.

B. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded ends.

C. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

D. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

E. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded ends.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1460
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-13
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 19.

G. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

H. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.

I. Excavate in accordance with Section 31 20 00.

J. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

L. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood.

M. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.

N. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.

O. Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.

2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.

4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

P. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1461
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-14

4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

5. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.

7. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

8. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.

Q. Sanitary, Waste and Vent Piping

1. Refer to Division 33 for Project-site sanitary sewer piping.

2. Refer to Division 23 for basic piping installation.

3. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

4. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 23 for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

5. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 23 for wall penetration systems.

6. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." a. Encase underground piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

7. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 deg rees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

8. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

9. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1462
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-15
a. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
1) Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
2) Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

10. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-ongrade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

11. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.

12. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.

13. Install underground ABS soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

14. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

R. Domestic Water Piping

1. Refer to Division 33 for site water distribution and service piping.

2. Refer to Division 23 for basic piping installation.

3. Extend domestic water service piping to exterior water distribution piping in sizes and locations indicated.

4. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 23 or sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

5. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 23 for wall penetration systems.

6. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside building at each domestic water service. Refer to Division 23 for pressure gages, and to Division 22 for drain valves and strainers.

7. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Refer to Division 22 for water-pressure regulators.

8. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 slope downward toward drain and plumb.

9. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

10. Perform the following steps before operation:
a. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
b. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1463
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-16
c. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
d. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation.
e. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
f. Remove filter cartridges from housings, and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.

11. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

Do not operate water heaters before filling with water.

12. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. a. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 80 psig maximum, unless otherwise indicated.

13. Energize pumps and verify proper operation.

S. Hangers and Supports

1. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

2. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

Support pipes of various sizes together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

4. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

5. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

7. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1464
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-17
facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

8. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

10. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
a. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
1) Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
2) Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
3) Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9. b. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
c. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 deg rees.
d. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
1) NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. 2) NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
e. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. f. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

11. METAL FABRICATION
a. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1) Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2) Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3) Remove welding flux immediately.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1465
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-18
4) Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

12. ADJUSTING
a. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

13. PAINTING
a. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). See Division 9 for paint materials and application requirements.
b. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.4 JOINT CONNECTIONS
A. Sanitary, Waste and Vent Piping
B. Refer to Division 23 Section for basic piping joint construction.

1. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." a. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. b. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

2. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, leadfree-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Domestic Water Piping

1. Refer to Division 23 Section for basic piping joint construction.

2. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1466
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-19
F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.

3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

G. Check valves must be installed to follow any manufacturer recommendations regarding distance from pump discharge.

H. Sanitary, Waste and Vent Piping

1. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge. a. Use gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller. b. Use gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, downstream from shutoff valve, on each sewage pump discharge.

3. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow. a. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, inless otherwise indicated.
b. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwater valve.
c. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.

I. Domestic Water Piping

1. Install sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. a. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
b. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

3.6 APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.

B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1467
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-20
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.

D. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

E. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment.

F. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.

G. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.

H. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.

3.7 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Sanitary Waste and Vent

1. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range:
a. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Use NPS 1-1/2 hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
1) Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 301, stainless steel.
2) Couplings: Heavy-duty, FMG approved.
b. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
1) Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 301, stainless steel.
2) Couplings: Heavy-duty, FMG approved.

4. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range:
a. NPS 1-1/2: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
1) Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 301, stainless steel.
2) Couplings: Heavy-duty, FMG approved.
b. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
1) Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 301, stainless steel.
2) Couplings: Heavy-duty, FMG approved.

B. Domestic Water Piping

1. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1468
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-21

3. Domestic Water Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range:
a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

3.8 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Service: Ball, butterfly, or globe valves.

3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.

3.9 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS APPLICATIONS
A. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections.

B. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

3. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

4. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

5. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

6. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

7. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

C. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1469
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-22
D. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.

E. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (675 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1350 kg).

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

F. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density, 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength, water-repellenttreated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1470
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-23
G. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.

3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

3.10 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.

B. Sanitary, Waste and Vent Piping

1. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

2. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
a. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22.
b. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22. d. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Domestic Water Piping

1. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

2. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

3. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

4. Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following:
a. Booster Systems: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. b. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1471
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-24
c. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22. d. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.11 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 23 for basic piping joint construction.

B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

B. Sanitary, Waste and Vent Piping

1. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

2. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

3. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.
b. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

5. Cleaning
a. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. b. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1472
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-25
c. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

6. Protection
a. Exposed ABS Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

C. Domestic Water Piping

1. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test domestic water piping as follows:
a. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
b. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
c. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.

Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
d. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
e. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3. Cleaning
a. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1473
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-26
1) Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.
2) Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below:
(a) Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.
(b) Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
(1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves
and allow to stand for 24 hours.
(2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow
to stand for three hours.
(c) Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.
(d) Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
b. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. c. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

END OF SECTION 22 10 05

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1474
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-1
SECTION 22 10 06 - PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof and floor drains.

B. Cleanouts.

C. Hose bibs.

D. Thermostatic mixing valves.

E. Strainers.

F. Trap seal primer valves.

G. Miscellaneous piping specialties.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 22 00 00 - Plumbing.

B. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.

C. Section 22 41 00 - Plumbing Fixtures.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2017 (ANSI/ASSE 1011).

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions Section 4.19.

B. Product Data: Include rated capacities and indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following:

1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.

2. Balancing valves and strainers.

3. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.

4. Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems.

5. Hose bibbs and hydrants.

6. Backwater valves, cleanouts, floor drains, open receptors, and trench drains.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and maintenance data for the following:

1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.

2. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.

3. Trap seal primer valves and systems.

E. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.

F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow preventers, water hammer arrestors valves.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1475
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-2
H. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years documented experience.

B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping materials and installation.

E. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potablewater piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig

2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. See Plumbing Schedules Plumbing sheet P0.2 Sheet and Architectural A2-802 Detail 3 PPLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE for particular fixtures.

B. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1476
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-3

3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 DRAINS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jrsmith.com.

2. Josam Company: www.josam.com.

3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.

4. Substitutions: See Division 1 - Product Requirements.

B. Area Drains:

1. Assembly: ASME A112.6.4.

2. Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump.

3. Strainer: Round nickel-bronze.

C. Floor Drain (SPEC TAG 22.09):

1. Floor Drains (SPEC TAG 22.09), Comply with ASME A112.21.1M. a. Body Material: Gray iron.
b. Seepage Flange: Required.
c. Clamping Device: Required.
d. Outlet: Bottom.
e. Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Acid-resistant enamel. f. Sediment Bucket: Not required.
g. Top or Strainer Material: Gray iron.
h. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
i. Top Shape: Round.
j. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: See schedule.
k. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
l. Funnel: Not required.
m. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal primer valve connection.
n. Trap Material: Cast iron.
o. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
p. Trap Features: Cleanout.

2.3 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jrsmith.com.

2. Josam Company: www.josam.com.

3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.

4. Substitutions: See Division 1 - Product Requirements.

B. Cleanouts: Comply with ASME A112.36.2M.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1477
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-4
C. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.

D. Clamping Device: Required.

E. Outlet Connection: Threaded.

F. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.

G. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.

H. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Painted cast iron.

I. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

J. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.

2.4 HOSE BIBBS (SPEC TAG 22.13)
A. Manufacturers:

1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jrsmith.com.

2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.

3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.

4. Substitutions: See Division 1 - Product Requirements.

B. Exterior Lockable Hose Bibbs:

1. Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed with lockshield and removable key, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011.

C. Interior Mixing Type Hose Bibbs:

1. Bronze or brass, wall mounted, double service faucet with hose thread spout, integral stops, chrome plated where exposed with handwheels, and vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011.

2. A. Provide lockable hose bibs as shown on the plans and called out in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule with three (3) sets of loose keys to be supplied to Owner upon completion.

2.5 MIXING VALVES (Only Where Applicable)
A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:

1. Manufacturers:
a. ESBE: https://www.esbe.eu/group/products/thermostatic-mixing-valves b. Leonard Valve Company: www.leonardvalve.com.
c. Honeywell Water Controls: http://yourhome.honeywell.com. d. Substitutions: See Division 1 - Product Requirements.

2. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows, integral temperature adjustment.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1478
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-5

3. Accessories:
a. Check valve on inlets.
b. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet.
c. Stem thermometer on outlet.
d. Strainer stop checks on inlets.

4. Cabinet: 16 gage prime coated steel, for recessed mounting with keyed lock.

B. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze body.

Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-water-supply inlets, adjustable temperature setting, and thermometer.

1. Type: Bimetal thermostat, operation and pressure rating 125 psig minimum.

2. Type: Liquid-filled motor, operation and pressure rating 100 psig minimum.

C. Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: Unit, with the following:

D. Piping, valves, and unions. Include thermometer if not in cabinet.

E. Piping Component Finish: Polished chrome plate.

F. Cabinet: Recessed-mounting steel box with steel hinged door, white enameled finish, and thermometer in front.

G. Cabinet: Recessed-mounting stainless-steel box with stainless-steel hinged door and thermometer in front.

2.6 STRAINERS
A. Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping. Include ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise indicated.

2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.

3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and flanged ends.

4. Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown. a. Drain: Pipe plug.

5. T-Pattern Strainers: Malleable-iron or ductile-iron body with grooved ends; access end cap with drain plug and access coupling with rubber gasket.

6. Basket Strainers: Bolted flange or clamp cover, and basket with lift-out handle. a. Type: Simplex with one basket.
b. Drain: Pipe plug.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1479
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-6

7. Drainage Basket Strainers: Non-pressure-rated, cast-iron or coated-steel body; with bolted flange or clamp cover and drain with plug.
a. Basket: Bronze or stainless steel with 1/8- or 3/16-inch- diameter holes and liftout handle. b. Female threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller, and flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2.7 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the following characteristics:

1. 3 psi pressure drop activation.

2. 125 psig minimum working pressure.

3. Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.

4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.

5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.

6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished.

B. Drainage-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1044, fixture-trap, waste-drainage-fed type, with the following characteristics:

1. Chrome-plated, cast-brass, NPS 1-1/4 minimum, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection.

2.8 DRAIN VALVES
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP.

Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.

1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.

3. Select paragraph and subparagraphs above or first paragraph below. Select above if throttling is required.

B. Hose-End Drain Valve: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet and cap.

Hose bibbs are prohibited for this application.

C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig minimum CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 1/8 side drain outlet and cap.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 23 for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1480
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-7
B. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve.

C. Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

D. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.

E. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors if indicated.

F. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

G. Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below floors.

H. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.

I. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

J. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing according to manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.

Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1481
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-8

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

L. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.

M. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.

N. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing specialties.

O. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations.

P. Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, gate, or globe valve in inlet and drain piping from outlet to floor drain.

Q. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

R. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

S. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

T. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

U. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

V. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

W. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs.

X. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.

3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

B. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 26.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each backflow preventer.

B. Text: Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1482
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-9

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION 27 10 06

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1483
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 -1
SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Toilets.

B. Urinals.

C. Lavatories.

D. Service sinks.

E. Drinking fountains.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 22 00 00 – Plumbing
B. Section 22 08 13 – Testing Piping Systems
C. Section 22 10 05 – Plumbing Piping
D. Section 22 10 06 – Plumbing Piping Specialties

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specifications, installation and startup instructions, capacity, and ratings, with selection indicated. Provide pump performance curves with selection points indicated. Provide specialties and accessories required for a complete and operable installation.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages.

2. Submit For:
a. Fixtures, see Plumbing Fixture Schedule
b. Floor and roof drains
D. Wiring Diagrams: Ladder type wiring diagrams for components, indicating required field electrical connections.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each item. Include “troubleshooting” maintenance guides. Include this data in maintenance manual.

1.4 Plumbing Fixtures
A. General: Provide factory fabricated fixtures of type, style, and material indicated on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the Drawings. For each type fixture, provide fixture manufacturer’s standard trim, carrier, seats, and valves as indicated by their published product information; either as designed and constructed, or as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for complete installation. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is installer’s option; but fixtures of same type must be furnished by a single manufacturer. Where type is not otherwise indicated, provide fixtures complying with governing regulations.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1484
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 -2

1. Fixtures: Complete with fittings, supports, fastening devices, faucets, valves, traps, stops, and appurtenances required.

2. Exposed IPS Piping and Tubing: Brass, chrome plated.

3. Escutcheons: Brass, chrome plated.

4. Fixture Locations: As shown on Drawings.

5. Stops: Stops installed in each supply pipe at each fixture accessibly located with wall escutcheons.

6. Public Lavatories: Provide faucets with flow control device to prevent flow over 0.5 GPM. Provide water closets with flow control device to prevent flow over 1.28 GPF.

1.5 Delivery, Handling, and Storage
A. Fixtures: Deliver plumbing fixtures individually wrapped in factory fabricated containers. Handle plumbing fixtures carefully to prevent breakage, chipping and scoring fixture finish. Do not install damaged plumbing fixtures replace and return damaged units to equipment manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 TOILETS
A. Toilet Manufacturers (SPEC TAG 22-05):

1. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

2. Substitutions: follow procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions Section 4.20.

B. Toilet: ASME A112.19.3; high efficiency and low consumption tank type.

1. Flush System: Gravity feed, wash down with full-flush consumption of 1.28 GPF.

2. Seat: Manufacturer’s standard.

3. Material: 304 Stainless Steel.

4. ADA Compliant.

5. Automatic Flushometer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1485
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 -3

2.3 URINALS
A. Urinal Manufacturers:

1. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

2. Substitutions: follow procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions.

B. Urinal: ASME A112.19.3; high efficiency and low consumption tank type.

1. Flush System: High efficiency with full-flush consumption of 0.125 GPF.

2. Material: 304 Stainless Steel.

3. ADA Compliant.

4. Automatic Flushometer.

2.4 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatory Manufacturers:

1. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

2. Substitutions: follow procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions.

B. Supply Faucet Manufacturers:

1. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

2. Substitutions: See Division 1 - Substitution Procedures.

3. Supply Faucet: ASME A112.19.3; stainless steel combination supply fitting, water economy aerator with maximum flow of 0.35 gallons per minute.

4. ADA Compliant.

2.5 DRINKING FOUNTAINS
A. Drinking Fountain Manufacturers:

1. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

2. Substitutions: follow procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions.

B. Fountain shall include pushbutton on the front. Shall include contoured-formed basin to eliminate splashing and standing water, and shall have rounded corners and edges. Projector shall be chrome-plated vandal-resistant type with integral hood guard and anti-squirt feature.

Fountain shall comply with ANSI 117:1 and ADA for visual and motion disabilities. The manufacturer shall certify the unit to meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61, and the Safe Drinking Water Act.

2.6 SERVICE SINKS
A. Service Sink Manufacturers:

1. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

2. Substitutions: follow procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1486
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 -4

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.

B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.

2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.

3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

E. Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals.

G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing-in drawings.

I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture.

J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1487
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 -5
L. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment.

M. Install toilet seats on water closets.

N. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

O. Install water-supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

P. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

Q. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

R. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

Refer to Division 23 for escutcheons.

S. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

T. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.

U. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.

V. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

Connect to plumbing piping.

W. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections:

Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing piping.

X. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-hanging fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

Y. Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water coolers to mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated.

Z. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

AA. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

AB. Adjust drinking fountain/water cooler flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

AC. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.

AD. Install components level and plumb.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1488
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 -6
AE. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, color to match fixture.

3.4 APPLICATIONS
A. Drinking Fountains

1. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-hanging fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Use mounting frames for recessed water coolers, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Set freestanding and pedestal drinking fountains on floor.

4. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.

3.5 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.

B. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION 22 41 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1489
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 23 34 16 - 1
SECTION 23 34 16 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Inline centrifugal fans.

B. Fan accessories.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 52 16 – SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing
B. Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2016 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51).

B. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2016 with 2021 Amendments.

C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Fourth Edition, 2021.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

1. Motors shall be NEMA premium efficiency at a minimum.

C. Performance Base: Sea level conditions.

D. Temperature Limit: Maximum 300 degrees F.

E. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

1. Fan operating efficiency.

2. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

3. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1490
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 23 34 16 - 2

4. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. a. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include complete installation instructions.

E. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Permanent fans may not be used for ventilation during construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Greenheck
B. Panasonic
C. Follow Substitution procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions Section 4.20.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick opening latches and gaskets.

2.3 CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS
A. Fan shall be EnergyStar rated, with additional Multi-Speed with time delay, Motion Sensor and Condensation Sensor Modules.

B. Fan motor shall be totally enclosed, four pole condenser type engineered to run continuously.

C. Fan shall be UL listed for installation in a tub/shower enclosure when used with GFCI branch circuit wiring.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1491
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 23 34 16 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

C. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated.

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

END OF SECTION 23 24 16

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1492
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260500 - 1
General Electrical Requirements
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
SECTION 260500 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Description of Work:

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all required labor, supervision, materials and equipment to satisfactorily complete all electrical installations that are shown on the Drawings, included in these specifications, or otherwise needed for a complete and fully operating facility.

B. Furnish and install all required in-place equipment, conduits, conductors, cables and any miscellaneous materials for the satisfactory interconnection and operation of all associated electrical systems.

1.2 Related Work:

A. This Section provides the basic Electrical Requirements which supplement the General Requirements of Division 01 and apply to all Sections of Division 26.

1.3 Submittals:

A. As specified in Division 01. Submit to the Architect shop drawings, manufacturer's data and certificates for equipment, materials and finish, and pertinent details for each system specified.

Information to be submitted includes manufacturer's descriptive literature of cataloged products, equipment, drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves as applicable, test data and catalog cuts. Obtain written approval before procurement, fabrication, or delivery of the items to the job site. Partial submittals are not acceptable and will be returned without review. Furnish manufacturer's name, trade name, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, project specification and paragraph reference, applicable Federal, Industry and Technical Society Publication References, and years of satisfactory service of each item required to establish contract compliance. Photographs of existing installations and data submitted in lieu of catalog data are not acceptable and will be returned without approval.

B. Organize submittals for equipment and items related to each specification section together as a package.

C. Proposed substitutions of products will not be reviewed or approved prior to awarding of the Contract.

D. Substitutions shall be proven to the Architect or Engineer to be equal or superior to the specified product. Architect’s decision is final. The Contractor shall pay all costs incurred by the Architect and Engineer in reviewing and processing any proposed substitutions whether or not a proposed substitution is accepted.

E. If a proposed substitution is rejected, the contractor shall furnish the specified product at no increase in contract price.

F. If a proposed substitution is accepted, the contractor shall be completely responsible for all dimensional changes, electrical changes, or changes to other work which are a result of the substitution. The accepted substitution shall be made at no additional cost to the owner or design consultants.

1.4 Quality Assurance:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1493
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260500 - 2
General Electrical Requirements
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
A. Codes: All electrical equipment and materials, including installation and testing, shall conform to the latest editions following applicable codes:

1. California Electrical Code (CEC).

2. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) standards.

3. All applicable local codes, rules and regulations.

4. Electrical Contractor shall posses a C-10 license and all other licenses as may be required. Licenses shall be in effect at start of this contract and be maintained throughout the duration of this contract.

B. Variances: In instances where two or more codes are at variance, the most restrictive requirement shall apply.

C. Standards: Equipment shall conform to applicable standards of American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Electronics Industries Association (EIA), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), and National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

D. Underwriter Laboratories (UL) listing is required for all equipment and materials where such listing is offered by the Underwriters Laboratories. Provide service entrance labels for all equipment required by the NEC to have such labels.

E. The electrical contractor shall guarantee all work and materials installed under this contract for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance by owner.

F. All work and materials covered by this specification shall be subject to inspection at any and all times by representatives of the owner. Work shall not be closed in or covered before inspection and approval by the owner or his representative. Any material found not conforming with these specifications shall, within 3 days after being notified by the owner, be removed from premises; if said material has been installed, entire expense of removing and replacing same, including any cutting and patching that may be necessary, shall be borne by the contractor.

1.5 Contract Documents:

A. Drawings and Specifications:

1. In the case of conflict between the drawings and specifications, the specifications shall take precedence.

2. Drawings and specifications are intended to comply with all law, ordinances, rules and regulations of constituted authorities having jurisdiction, and where referred to in the Contract Documents, said laws, ordinance, rules and regulations shall be considered as a part of said Contract Documents within the limits specified. The Contractor shall bear all expenses of correcting work done contrary to said laws, ordinance, rules and regulations if the Contractor knew or should have known that the work as performed is contrary to said laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and if the Contractor performed same (1) without first consulting the Architect for further instructions regarding said work and/or (2) disregarded the Architect’s instructions regarding said work.

B. Drawings: The Electrical Drawings shall govern the general layout of the completed construction.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1494
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260500 - 3
General Electrical Requirements
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

1. Locations of equipment, panels, pullboxes, conduits, stub-ups, ground connections are approximate unless dimensioned; verify locations with the Architect prior to installation.

2. Review the Drawings and Specification Divisions of other trades and perform the electrical work that will be required for those installations.

3. Should there be a need to deviate from the Electrical Drawings and Specifications, submit written details and reasons for all changes to the Architect for approval.

4. The general arrangement and location of existing conduits, piping, apparatus, etc., is approximate. The drawings and specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the contractor, exact locations, distances and elevations are governed by actual field conditions. Accuracy of data given herein and on the drawings is not guaranteed. Minor changes may be necessary to accommodate work. The contractor is responsible for verifying existing conditions. Should it be necessary to deviate from the design due to interference with existing conditions or work in progress, claims for additional compensation shall be limited to those for work required by unforeseen conditions as determined by the Architect.

5. All drawings and divisions of these specifications shall be considered as whole. The contractor shall report any apparent discrepancies to the Architect prior to submitting bids.

6. The contractor shall be held responsible to have examined the site and compared it with the specifications and plans and to have satisfied himself as to the conditions under which the work is to be performed. He shall be held responsible for knowledge of all existing conditions whether or not accurately described. No subsequent allowance shall be made for any extra expense due to failure to make such examination.

1.6 Closeout Submittals:

A. Manuals: Furnish manuals for equipment where manuals are specified in the equipment specifications or are specified in Division 01.

1.7 Coordination:

A. Coordinate the electrical work with the other trades, code authorities, utilities and the Architect.

B. Provide and install all trenching, backfilling, conduit, pull boxes, splice boxes, etc. for all Utility Company services to the locations indicated on the Drawings. All materials and construction shall be in accordance with the requirements for all the Utility Companies. Prior to performing any work, the Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with the various Utility Companies and obtain utility company engineering drawings. Verify that all such work and materials shown on the Drawings are of sufficient sizes and correctly located to provide services on the site. The Electrical Contractor shall verify with all the Utility Companies that additional contractor furnished and installed work is not required. If additional work, materials, or changes are required by any of the Utility Companies, the Electrical Contractor shall advise the Architect of such changes and no further work shall then be performed until instructed to do so by the Architect. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with the various Utility Companies to schedule inspections and to obtain service connections.

C. The Electrical Contractor shall schedule all utility work necessary for utility inspections, connections, cable installation, etc. for the new electrical service to meet the construction schedule.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1495
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260500 - 4
General Electrical Requirements
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
D. Utility Company charges shall be paid by the Owner.

E. Contractor shall pay all inspection and other applicable fees and procure all permits necessary for the completion of this work.

F.Where connections must be made to existing installations, properly schedule all the required work, including the power shutdown periods.

G. When two trades join together in an area, make certain that no electrical work is omitted.

1.8 Job Conditions:

A. Operations: Perform all work in compliance with 01

1. Keep the number and duration of power shutdown periods to a minimum.

2. Show all proposed shutdowns and their expected duration on the construction schedule.

Schedule and carry out shutdowns so as to cause the least disruption to operation of the Owner's facilities.

3. Carry out shutdown only after the schedule has been approved, in writing, by the owner.

Submit power interruption schedule 15 days prior to date of interruption.

B. Construction Power: Unless otherwise noted in Division 01 of these specifications, contractor shall make all arrangements and provide all necessary facilities for temporary construction power from the owner’s on-site source. Energy costs shall be paid for by the Owner.

C. Storage: Provide adequate storage for all equipment and materials which will become part of the completed facility so that it is protected from weather, dust, water, or construction operations.

1.9 Damaged Products:

A. Notify the Architect in writing in the event that any equipment or material is damaged. Obtain approval from the Architect before making repairs to damaged products.

1.10 Locations:

A. General: Use equipment, materials and wiring methods suitable for the types of locations in which they are located.

B. Dry Locations: All those indoor areas which do not fall within the definition below for Wet Locations and which are not otherwise designated on the Drawings.

C. Wet Locations: All locations exposed to the weather, whether under a roof or not, unless otherwise designated on the Drawings.

1.11 Safety and Indemnity:

A. The Contractor is solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continually and not be limited to normal working hours. The contractor shall provide and maintain throughout the work site proper safeguards including, but not limited to, enclosures, barriers, warning signs, lights, etc. to prevent accidental injury to people or damage to property.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1496
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260500 - 5
General Electrical Requirements
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
B. No act, service, drawing review or construction review by the Owner, the Engineer or their Consultants is intended to include reviews of the adequacy of the Contractors safety measures in or near the construction site.

C. The Contractor performing work under this Division of the Specifications shall hold harmless, indemnify, and defend the Owner, the Engineer, their consultants, and each of their officers, agents and employees from any and all liability claims, losses, or damage arising out of or alleged to arise from bodily injury, sickness, or death of a person or persons and for all damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property arising directly or indirectly out of or in connection with the performance of the work under this Division of the Specifications, and from the Contractor's negligence in the performance of the work described in the construction contract documents, but not including liability that may be due to the sole negligence of the Owner, the Engineer, their Consultants or their officers, agents and employees.

D. If a work area is encountered that contains hazardous materials, the contractor is advised to coordinate with the owner and its abatement consultant for abatement of hazardous material by the Owner’s Representative. “Hazardous materials” means any toxic substance regulated or controlled by OSHA, EPA, State of California or local rules, regulations and laws. Nothing herein shall be construed to create a liability for Aurum Consulting Engineers regarding hazardous materials abatement measures, or discovery of hazardous materials.

1.12 Access Doors:

A. The contractor shall install access panels as required where floors, walls or ceilings must be penetrated for access to electrical, control, fire alarm or other specified electrical devices. The minimum size panel shall be 14” x 14” in usable opening. Where access by a service person is required, minimum usable opening shall be 18” x 24”.

B. All access doors installed lower than 7’-0” above finished floor and exposed to public access shall have keyed locks.

C. Where specific information or details relating to access panels differ from Division 26 paragraph 1.12 of these specifications, or shown on the electrical drawings and details or under other Divisions of work, those requirements shall supersede these specifications.

1.13 Arc Flash:

A. The contractor shall install a clearly visible arc flash warning to the inside door of all panelboards and industrial control panels, as well as to the front of all switchboards and motor control centers that are a part of this project.

B. The warning shall have the following wording: line 1 “WARNING” (in large letters), line 2 “Potential Arc Flash Hazard” (in medium letters), line 3 & 4 “Appropriate Personal Protective Equipment and Tools required when working on this equipment”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Standard of Quality:

A. Products that are specified by manufacturer, trade name or catalog number establish a standard of quality and do not prohibit the use of equal products of other manufacturers provided they are established to be equal to the specified product and approved by the Architect prior to installation.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1497
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260500 - 6
General Electrical Requirements
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
B. Material and Equipment: Provide materials and equipment that are new and are current products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. The two-year period includes use of equipment and materials of similar size under similar circumstances. For uniformity, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of product.

C. Service Support: Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations including their addresses and qualification for support of the equipment. These service organizations shall be convenient to the equipment installation and able to render service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

D. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures are required to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, furnish printed copies of the recommendations prior to installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until recommendations are received. Failure to furnish recommendation shall be cause for rejection of the equipment or material.

2.2 Nameplates:

A. For each piece of electrical equipment, provide a manufacturer's nameplate showing his name, location, the pertinent ratings, the model designation, and shop order number.

B. Identify each piece of equipment and related controls with a rigid laminated engraved plastic nameplate. Unless otherwise noted, nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0.125-inch-thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square.

Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 0.5 by 2.5 inches unless otherwise noted. Where not otherwise specified, lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25-inch-high normal block style. Engrave nameplates with the inscriptions indicated on the Drawings and, if not so indicated, with the equipment name. Securely fasten nameplates in place using two stainless steel or brass screws.

2.3 Fasteners:

A. Fasteners for securing equipment to walls, floors and the like shall be either hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or stainless steel.

2.4 Finish requirements:

A. Equipment: Refer to each electrical equipment section of these Specifications for painting requirements of equipment enclosures. Repair any final paint finish which has been damaged or is otherwise unsatisfactory, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

B. Wiring System: In finished areas, paint all exposed conduits, boxes and fittings to match the color of the surface to which they are affixed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Workmanship:

A. Ensure that all equipment and materials fit properly in their installation.

B. Perform any required work to correct improperly fit installation at no additional expense to the owner.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1498
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260500 - 7
General Electrical Requirements
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
C. All electrical equipment and materials shall be installed in a neat and workmanship manner in accordance with the “NECA-1 Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting”. Workmanship of the entire job shall be first class in every respect.

3.2 Equipment Installations:

A. Provide the required inserts, bolts and anchors, and securely attach all equipment and materials to their supports.

B. Do all the cutting and patching necessary for the proper installation of work and repair any damage done.

C. Earthquake restraints: electrical components shall be anchored and installed per the details on the DSA-approved construction documents. The following components shall be anchored or braced to meet the force and displacement requirements prescribed in the 2022 CBC Sections 1617A.1.18 through 1617A.1.26 and ASCE 7-16 Chapters 13, 26, and 30: electrical distribution systems shall be braced to comply with the forces and displacements prescribed in ASCE 7-16 Section 13.3 as defined in ASVE 7-16 Sections 13.6.5, 13.6.6, 13.6.7, 13.6.8, and 2022 CBC, Sections 1617A.1.24, 1617A.1.25 and 1617A.1.26
D. Structural work: All core drilling, bolt anchor insertion, or cutting of existing structural concrete shall be approved by a California registered structural consulting engineer prior to the execution of any construction. At all floor slabs and structural concrete walls to be drilled, cut or bolt anchors inserted, the contractor shall find and mark all reinforcing in both faces located by means of x-ray, pach-ometer, or prof-ometer. Submit sketch showing location of rebar and proposed cuts, cores, or bolt anchor locations for approval.

3.3 Field Test:

A. Test shall be in accordance with Acceptance testing specifications issued by the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA).

B. Perform equipment field tests and adjustments. Properly calibrate, adjust and operationally check all circuits and components, and demonstrate as ready for service. Make additional calibration and adjustments if it is determined later that the initial adjustments are not satisfactory for proper performance. Perform equipment field test for equipment where equipment field tests are specified in the equipment Specifications. Give sufficient notice to the Architect prior to any test so that the tests may be witnessed.

C. Provide instruments, other equipment and material required for the tests. These shall be of the type designed for the type of tests to be performed. Test instrument shall be calibrated by a recognized testing laboratory within three months prior to performing tests.

D. Operational Tests: Operationally test all circuits to demonstrate that the circuits and equipment have been properly installed and adjusted and are ready for full-time service.

Demonstrate the proper functioning of circuits in all modes of operation, including alarm conditions.

E. Re-testing will be required for all unsatisfactory tests after the equipment or system has been repaired. Re-test all related equipment and systems if required by the Architect. Repair and re-test equipment and systems which have been satisfactorily tested but later fail, until satisfactory performance is obtained.

F. Maintain records of each test and submit five copies to the Architect when testing is complete.

All tests shall be witnessed by the Architect. These records shall include:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1499
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260500 - 8
General Electrical Requirements
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

1. Name of equipment tested.

2. Date of report.

3. Date of test.

4. Description of test setup.

5. Identification and rating of test equipment.

6. Test results and data.

7. Name of person performing test.

8. Owner or Architect's initials.

G. Items requiring testing shall be as noted in the additional electrical sections of these specifications.

3.4 Cleaning Equipment:

A. Thoroughly clean all soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials.

3.5 Painting of Equipment:

A. Factory Applied: Electrical equipment shall have factory applied painting system which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA ICS 6 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements specified in the technical section.

B. Field Applied: Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces.

3.6 Records:

A. Maintain one copy of the contract Drawing Sheets on the site of the work for recording the "as built" condition. After completion of the work, the Contractor shall carefully mark the work as actually constructed, revising, deleting and adding to the Drawing Sheets as required. The following requirements shall be complied with:

1. Cable Size and Type: Provide the size and type of each cable installed on project.

2. Substructure: Where the location of all underground conduits, pull boxes, stub ups and etc. where are found to be different than shown, carefully mark the correct location on the Drawings. Work shall be dimensioned from existing improvements.

3. Size of all conduit runs.

4. Routes of concealed conduit runs and conduit runs below grade.

5. Homerun points of all branch circuit.

6. Location of all switchgear, panels, MCC, lighting control panels, pullcans, etc.

7. Changes made as a result of all approved change orders, addendums, or field authorized revisions.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1500
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260500 - 9
General Electrical Requirements
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

8. As Builts: At the completion of the Work the Contractor shall review, certify, correct and turn over the marked-up Drawings to the Architect for his use in preparing "as built" plans.

9. As built Drawings shall be delivered to the Architect within ten (10) days of completion of construction.

3.7 Clean Up:

A. Upon completion of electrical work, remove all surplus materials, rubbish, and debris that accumulated during the construction work. Leave the entire area neat, clean, and acceptable to the Architect.

3.8 Mechanical and Plumbing Electrical Work:

A. The requirements for electrical power and/or devices for all mechanical and plumbing equipment supplied and/or installed under this Contract shall be coordinated and verified with the following:

1. Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings.

2. Mechanical and Plumbing sections of these Specifications.

3. Manufacturers of the Mechanical and Plumbing equipment supplied.

B. The coordination and verification shall include the voltage, ampacity, phase, location and type of disconnect, control, and connection required. Any changes that are required as a result of this coordination and verification shall be a part of this Contract.

C. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install the following for all mechanical and plumbing equipment:

1. Line voltage conduit and wiring.

2. Disconnect switches.

3. Manual line motor starters.

D. Automatic line voltage controls and magnetic starters shall be furnished by the Mechanical and/or Plumbing Contractor and installed and connected by the Electrical Contractor. When subcontracted for by the Mechanical and/or Plumbing Contractor, all line voltage control wiring installed by the Electrical Contractor shall be done per directions from the Mechanical and/or Plumbing Contractor.

E. All low voltage control wiring for Mechanical and Plumbing equipment shall be installed in conduit. Furnishing, installation and connection of all low voltage conduit, boxes, wiring and controls shall be by the Mechanical and/or Plumbing Contractor.

F. Disconnects (Motor and Circuit)

1. Disconnect switches shall be provided and located at all motors.

2. Switches for three-phase motors shall be heavy-duty, horsepower rated three-pole, and surface mounted except as noted on drawings.

3. Switches containing more than three poles shall be as specified on the drawings.

4. Switches for single-phase, fractional horsepower motors shall be heavy-duty, horsepower rated.

5. Disconnect switches shall be as manufactured by ITE- Siemens, General Electric or Square D.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1501
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260500 - 10
General Electrical Requirements
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
G. Disconnects (Motor: Fused):

1. Disconnect switches shall be provided and located at all motors.

2. Switches for three-phase motors shall be heavy-duty, horsepower rated three-pole, and surface mounted except as noted on drawings.

3. Switches containing more than three poles shall be as specified on the drawings.

4. Switches for single-phase, fractional horsepower motors shall be heavy-duty, horsepower rated.

5. Disconnect switches shall be as manufactured by ITE- Siemens, General Electric or Square D.

H. Manual motor starters, where required, shall have toggle type operators with pilot light and melting alloy type overload relays, SQUARE D COMPANY, Class 2510, Type FG-1P (surface) or Type FS-1P (flush) or ITE, WESTINGHOUSE or GENERAL ELECTRIC equal.

END OF SECTION 260500

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1502
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260519 - 1
Line Voltage Wire and Cable
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
SECTION 260519 - LINE VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Description of Work:

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all wire and cable rated 600 volts or less, including splices and terminations, as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

1.2 Related Work:

A. See the following Specification Section for work related to the work in this Section:

1. 260542 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings.

2. 260533 Junction and Pull Boxes.

1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Field tests shall be performed as specified in paragraph 3.04 of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Conductors:

A. Conductors shall be copper, type THHN/THWN/MTW oil and gasoline resistant, 600 volt rated insulation.

B. Conductors shall be stranded copper.

C. Minimum power and control wire size shall be No. 12 AWG unless otherwise noted.

D. All conductors used on this Project shall be of the same type and conductor material.

2.2 Cables:

A. All individual conductors shall be copper with type THHN/THWN, 600 volt rated insulation.

B. [Non-metallic – sheathed cable (Romex): Type “NM”, 600 volts rated with insulated copper conductors, No. 12 AWG minimum size, and internal copper ground wire.] C. [Type MC Armored Cable

1. Conductors shall be copper type THHN/THWN/MTW oil and gasoline resistant, 600 volt rated insulation.

2. Conductors shall be stranded copper No.8 AWG and above.

3. Minimum power and control wire shall be No.12 AWG unless otherwise noted.

4. All conductors used on this project shall be of the same type and conductor material.

5. Light weight aluminum interlocked armor.

6. Integral green insulated grounding conductor.]
D. Insulation Marking - All insulated conductors shall be identified with printing colored to contrast with the insulation color.

E. Color Coding - As specified in paragraph 3.03.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1503
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260519 - 2
Line Voltage Wire and Cable
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
F. Special Wiring - Where special wiring is proposed by an equipment manufacturer, submit the special wiring requirements to the Owner's Representative and, if approved, provide same.

Special wire shall be the type required by the equipment manufacturer.

G. Other Wiring - Wire or cable not specifically shown on the Drawings or specified, but required, shall be of the type and size required for the application and as approved by the Owner's Representative.

H. Manufacturer - Acceptable manufacturers including Cablec, Southwire, or equal.

2.3 Terminations:

A. Manufacturer - Terminals as manufactured by T&B, Burndy or equal.

B. Wire Terminations – Stranded conductors shall be terminated in clamping type terminations which serve to contain all the strands of the conductor. Curling of a stranded conductor around a screw type terminal is not allowed. For screw type terminations, use a fork type stake-on termination on the stranded conductor. Use only a stake-on tool approved for the fork terminals selected.

C. End Seals - Heat shrink plastic caps of proper size for the wire on which used.

2.4 Tape:

A. Tape used for terminations and cable marking shall be compatible with the insulation and jacket of the cable and shall be of plastic material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Cable Installation:

A. Clean Raceways - Clean all raceways prior to installation of cables as specified in Section 260542 - Conduits Raceway and Fittings.

B. All line voltage wiring shall be installed in conduit.

C. All feeder conductors shall be continuous from equipment to equipment. Splices in feeders are not permitted unless specifically noted or approved by the Electrical Engineer.

D. All branch circuit wiring shall be run concealed in ceiling spaces, walls, below floors or in crawl spaces unless noted otherwise.

E. Cable Pulling - Exercise care in pulling wires and cables into conduit or wireways so as to avoid kinking, putting undue stress on the cables or otherwise abrading them. No grease will be permitted in pulling cables. Only soapstone, talc, or UL listed pulling compound will be permitted.

The raceway construction shall be complete and protected from the weather before cable is pulled into it. Swab conduits before installing cables and exercise care in pulling, to avoid damage to conductors.

F. Bending Radius - Cable bending radius shall be per applicable code. Install feeder cables in one continuous length.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1504
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260519 - 3
Line Voltage Wire and Cable
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
G. Equipment Grounding Conductors - Provide an equipment grounding conductor, whether or not it is shown on the Drawings, in all conduits or all raceways.

H. Panelboard Wiring - In panels, bundle incoming wire and cables which are No. 6 AWG and smaller, lace at intervals not greater than 6 inches, neatly spread into trees and connect to their respective terminals. Allow sufficient slack in cables for alterations in terminal connections.

Perform lacing with plastic cable ties or linen lacing twine. Where plastic panel wiring duct is provided for cable runs, lacing is not necessary when the cable is properly installed in the duct.

3.2 Cable Terminations and Splices:

A. Splices - UL Listed wirenuts.

B. Terminations - Shall comply with the following:

1. Make up and form cable and orient terminals to minimize cable strain and stress on device being terminated on.

2. Burnish oxide from conductor prior to inserting in oxide breaking compound filled terminal.

3.3 Circuit and Conductor Identification:

A. Color Coding - Provide color coding for all circuit conductors. Insulation color shall be white for neutrals and green for grounding conductors. Conductor colors shall be as follows:

VOLTAGE 240/120V
Phase A Black
Phase B Red
Phase C Blue
Neutral White
Ground Green
B. Color coding shall be in the conductor insulation for all conductors #10 AWG and smaller; for larger conductors, color shall be either in the insulation or in colored plastic tape applied at every location where the conductor is readily accessible.

C. Circuit Identification - All underground distribution and service circuits shall be provided with plastic identification tags in each secondary box and at each termination. Tags shall identify the source transformer of the circuit and the building number(s) serviced by the circuit.

3.4 Field Tests:

A. All systems shall test free from short circuits and grounds, shall be free from mechanical and electrical defects, and shall show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground of not less than the requirements of the CEC. All circuits shall be tested for proper neutral connections.

B. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on circuits with #2 AWG and larger conductors to be energized with a line-to-neutral voltage of 120 volts or more. Make these tests before all equipment has been connected. Test the insulation with a 500Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The insulation resistance shall be 2 megohms or more. Submit results for review.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1505
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260519 - 4
Line Voltage Wire and Cable
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
END OF SECTION 260519

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1506
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260533- 1
Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
SECTION 260533 - OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all required labor, supervision, materials and equipment to satisfactorily complete all electrical installations shown on the drawings, included in these Specification, or otherwise needed for a complete and fully operating facility. The work shall include but not be limited to the following:

B. Furnish and install all required material, supports and miscellaneous material for the satisfactory interconnection of all associated electrical systems.

1.2 RELATED WORK:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work of this section.

1. 260500 General Electrical Requirements.

2. 260542 Conduits, Raceway and Fittings.

3. 260519 Line Voltage Wire and Cable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLET BOXES, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Standard Outlet Boxes: Galvanized, steel, knock-out type of size and configuration best suited to the application indicated on the Drawings. Minimum box size shall be 4 inches square (octagon for most light fixtures) by 1-1/2 inches deep with mud rings as required.

B. Switch boxes: Minimum box size shall be 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with mud rings as required. Install multiple switches in standard gang boxes with raised device covers suitable for the application indicated.

C. Conduit bodies: Cadmium plated, cast iron alloy. Conduit bodies with threaded conduit hubs and neoprene gasketed, cast iron covers. Bodies shall be used to facilitate pulling of conductors or to make changes in conduit direction only. Splices are not permitted in conduit bodies. CrouseHinds Form 8 Condulets, Appleton Form 35 Unilets or equal.

D. Sheet Metal Boxes: Use standard outlet or concrete ring boxes wherever possible; otherwise use a minimum 16-gauge galvanized sheet metal, NEMA I box sized to Code requirements with covers secured by cadmium plated machine screws located six inches on centers. Circle AW Products, Hoffman Engineering Company or equal.

E. Flush Mounted Pull boxes and Junction boxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush head cover retaining screws, prime coated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 OUTLET BOXES

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1507
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260533- 2
Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
A. General:

1. All outlet boxes shall finish flush with building walls, ceilings and floors except in mechanical and electrical rooms above accessible ceiling or where exposed work is called for on the Drawings.

2. Install raised device covers (plaster rings) on all switch and receptacle outlet boxes installed in masonry or stud walls or in furred, suspended or exposed concrete ceilings. Covers shall be of a depth to suit the wall or ceiling finish.

3. Leave no unused openings in any box. Install close-up plugs as required to seal openings.

B. Box Layout:

1. Outlet boxes shall be installed at the locations and elevations shown on the drawings or specified herein. Make adjustments to locations as required by structural conditions and to suit coordination requirements of other trades.

2. Locate switch outlet boxes on the latch side of doorways.

3. Outlet boxes shall not be installed back to back nor shall through-wall boxes be permitted.

Outlet boxes on opposite sides of a common wall shall be separated horizontally by at least one stud or vertical structural member.

4. For outlets mounted above counters, benches or backsplashes, coordinate location and mounting heights with built-in units. Adjust mounting height to agree with required location for equipment served.

5. On fire rated walls, the total face area of the outlet boxes shall not exceed 100 square inches per 100 square feet of wall area.

C. Supports:

1. Outlet Boxes installed in metal stud walls shall be equipped with brackets designed for attaching directly to the studs or shall be mounted on specified box supports.

2. Fixture outlet boxes installed in suspended ceiling of gypsum board or lath and plaster construction shall be mounted to 16-gauge metal channel bars attached to main ceiling runners.

3. Fixture outlet boxes installed in suspended ceilings supporting acoustical tiles or panels shall be supported directly from the structure above where pendant mounted lighting fixture are to be installed on the box.

4. Fixture Boxes above tile ceilings having exposed suspension systems shall be supported directly from the structure above.

5. Outlet and / or junction boxes shall not be supported by grid or fixture hanger wires at any locations.

3.2 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. General:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1508
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260533- 3
Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

1. Install junction or pull boxes where required to limit bends in conduit runs to not more than 360 degrees or where pulling tension achieved would exceed the maximum allowable for the cable to be installed. Note that these boxes are not shown on the Drawings.

2. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes in concealed locations above accessible ceilings or exposed in electrical rooms, utility rooms or storage areas.

3. Install raised covers (plaster rings) on boxes in stud walls or in furred, suspended or exposed concrete ceilings. Covers shall be of a depth to suit the wall or ceiling finish.

4. Leave no unused openings in any box. Install close-up plugs as required to seal openings.

5. Identify circuit numbers and panel on cover of junction box with black marker pen.

B. Box Layouts:

1. Boxes above hung ceilings having concealed suspension systems shall be located adjacent to openings for removable recessed lighting fixtures.

C. Supports:

1. Boxes installed in metal stud walls shall be equipped with brackets designed for attaching directly to the studs or shall be mounted on specified box supports.

2. Boxes installed in suspended ceilings of gypsum board or lath and plaster construction shall be mounted to 16-gauge metal channel bars attached to main ceiling runners.

3. Boxes installed in suspended ceilings supporting acoustical tiles or panels shall be supported directly from the structure above.

4. Boxes mounted above suspended acoustical tile ceilings having exposed suspension systems shall be supported directly from the structure above.

END OF SECTION 260533

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1509
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260542 - 1
Conduits, Raceways and Fittings
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
SECTION 260542 - CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Description of Work:

A. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing conduits, raceways and fittings as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

1.2 Related Work:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work in this section:

1. 260543 Underground Ducts

2. 260544 In Grade Pull Boxes

3. 260519 Line Voltage Wire and Cable

4. 260533 Junction and Pull Boxes
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Conduits, Raceways:

A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Couplings shall be compression or set-screw type.

B. Flexible Conduit: Flexible metal conduit shall be galvanized steel.

C. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS) shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Couplings shall be threaded type.

D. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit: Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be PVC Schedule 40 (PVC-40 or NEMA Type EPC-40) conduit approved for underground use and for use with 90˚ C wires.

2.2 Conduit Supports:

A. Supports for individual conduits shall be galvanized malleable iron one-hole type with conduit back spacer.

B. Supports for multiple conduits shall be hot-dipped galvanized Unistrut or Superstrut channels, or approved equal. All associated hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized.

C. Supports for EMT conduits shall be galvanized pressed steel single hole straps.

D. Clamp fasteners shall be by wedge anchors. Shot in anchors shall not be allowed.

2.3 Fittings:

A. Provide threaded-type couplings and connectors for rigid steel conduits; provide steel compression (watertight), or steel set-screw type for EMT, (die-cast zinc or malleable iron type fittings are not allowed). Provide threaded couplings and Meyers hubs for rigid steel conduit exposed to weather.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1510
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260542 - 2
Conduits, Raceways and Fittings
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
B. Fittings for flexible conduit shall be Appleton, Chicago, IL, Type ST, O-Z Gedney Series 4Q by General Signal Corp., Terryville, CT, T & B 5300 series, or approved equal.

C. Fittings for use with rigid steel shall be galvanized steel or galvanized cast ferrous metal; access fittings shall have gasketed cast covers and be Crouse Hinds Condulets, Syracuse, NY, Appleton Unilets, Chicago, IL, or approved equal. Provide threaded-type couplings and connectors; setscrew type and compression-type are not acceptable.

D. Fittings for use with rigid non-metallic conduit shall be PVC and have solvent-weld-type conduit connections.

E. Union couplings for conduits shall be the Erickson type and shall be Appleton, Chicago, IL, Type EC, O-Z Gedney 3-piece Series 4 by General Signal Corp., Terryvile, CT, or approved equal.

Threadless coupling shall not be used.

F. Bushings:

1. Bushings shall be the insulated type.

2. Bushings for rigid steel shall be insulated grounding type, O-Z Gedney Type HBLG, Appleton Type GIB, or approved equal.

G. Conduit Sealants:

1. Fire Retardant Types: Fire stop material shall be reusable, non-toxic, asbestos-free, expanding, putty type material with a 3-hour rating in accordance with UL Classification 35L4 or as specified on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Conduit, Raceway and Fitting Installation:

A. For conduit runs exposed to weather provide rigid metal (GRS).

B. For conduit run underground, in concrete or masonry block wall and under concrete slabs, install minimum ¾” size nonmetallic (PVC) with PVC elbows. Where conduits transition from underground or under slab to above grade install wrapped rigid metal (GRS) elbows and risers.

C. For conduit runs concealed in steel or wood framed walls or in ceiling spaces or exposed in interior spaces above six feet over the finished floor, install EMT.

D. Flexible metal conduit shall be used only for the connection of recessed lighting fixtures and motor connections unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Liquid-tight steel flexible conduit shall be used for motor connections.

E. The minimum size raceway shall be 1/2-inch unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

F. Installation shall comply with the CEC.

G. From pull point to pull point, the sum of the angles of all of the bends and offset shall not exceed 360 degrees.

H. Conduit Supports: Properly support all conduits as required by the NEC. Run all conduits concealed except where otherwise shown on the drawings.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1511
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260542 - 3
Conduits, Raceways and Fittings
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

1. Exposed Conduits: Support exposed conduits within three feet of any equipment or device and at intervals not exceeding NEC requirements; wherever possible, group conduits together and support on common supports. Support exposed conduits fastened to the surface of the concrete structure by one-hole clamps, or with channels. Use conduit spacers with one-hole clamps.
a. Conduits attached to walls or columns shall be as unobtrusive as possible and shall avoid windows. Run all exposed conduits parallel or at right angles to building lines. b. Group exposed conduits together. Arrange such conduits uniformly and neatly.

2. Support all conduits within three feet of any junction box, coupling, bend or fixture.

3. Support conduit risers in shafts with Unistrut Superstrut, or approved equal, channels and straps.

I. Moisture Seals: Provide in accordance with NEC paragraphs 230-8 and 300-5(g).

J. Where PVC conduit transitions from underground to above grade, provide rigid steel 90’s with risers. Rigid steel shall be half-lap wrapped with 20 mil tape and extend minimum 12” above grade.

K. Provide a nylon pull cord in each empty raceway.

L. Provide galvanized rigid steel factory fittings for galvanized rigid steel conduit.

M. Slope all underground raceways to provide drainage; for example, slope conduit from equipment located inside a building to the pull box or manhole located outside the building.

N. Conduits shall be blown out and swabbed prior to pulling wires, or installation of pull cord in empty conduits.

END OF SECTION 260542

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1512
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260543- 1
Underground Ducts
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing raceways, and raceway spacers with necessary excavation.

1.02 RELATED WORK:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work of this section.

1. 02200 Excavation and Backfill

2. 260542 Conduit Raceway and Fittings

1.03 STANDARDS AND CODES:

A. Work and material shall be in compliance with and according to the requirements of the latest revision of the following standards and codes.

1. National Electrical Code (NEC) (Latest Revision)

2. California Electrical Code (CEC).

3. Underground Installations CEC - Article 300.5

4. Rigid NonMetallic Conduit CEC - Article 347
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAYS:

A. As specified in Section 260542 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATION:

A. As specified in Section 02200, Excavation and Backfill and as required for the work shown on the Drawings.

3.02 INSTALL RACEWAYS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS.

3.03 SAND ENCASEMENT:

A. As specified in Section 02200 - Excavation and Backfill.

3.04 BACKFILL:

A. As specified in Section 02200 - Excavation and Backfill.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1513
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260543- 2
Underground Ducts
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
END OF SECTION 260543

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1514

AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260544 - 1
In Grade Pull Boxes
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
SECTION 260544 - IN GRADE PULL BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The work of this section consists of providing all labor, supervision, tools, materials, and performing all work necessary to furnish and install pre-cast concrete vaults, and pull boxes with necessary excavation.

1.2 RELATED WORK:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work of this section.

1. 02200 Excavation and Backfill.

2. 260543 Underground Ducts.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. As specified in Section 260500 and Division 01.

1. Catalog Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature - Pre-cast Vaults, Pull Boxes and Accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

A. General Requirements:

1. Pull boxes for electrical power, controls and other communication circuits shall consist of pre-cast reinforced concrete boxes, extensions' bases, and covers as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. Pre-cast units shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of pre-cast vaults and pull boxes. Acceptable manufacturers are Christy, Utility Vault, Brooks, Associated Concrete or equal.

B. Construction:

1. Pre-cast concrete vaults and pull boxes for electrical power distribution and communication circuits with associated risers and tops shall conform to ASTM C478 and ACI 318. Pull boxes shall be the type noted on the Drawings and shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable details as shown. Tops and walls shall consist of reinforced concrete. Walls and bottom shall be of monolithic concrete construction. Duct entrances and windows shall be located near the corners of structures to facilitate cable racking.

C. Covers:

1. The word "ELECTRICAL" shall be cast in the top face of all electrical cable boxes. The word “Signal” or “Fire Alarm” shall be cast in the top of the boxes utilized for these systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1515

AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 260544 - 2
In Grade Pull Boxes
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install pull boxes where required to limit bends in conduit runs to not more than 360 degrees or where pulling tension achieved would exceed the maximum allowable for the cable to be installed. Note that these boxes are not shown on the Drawings.

B. Pre-cast pull boxes shall be installed approximately where indicated on the Drawings. The exact location of each pull box shall be determined after careful consideration has been given to the location of other utilities, grading, and paving. All cable boxes and secondary pull boxes shall be installed with a minimum of 6-inch thick crushed rock or sand bedding.

C. Paved areas - Vaults and pull boxes located in areas to be paved shall be installed such that the top of the cover shall be flush with the finished surface of the paving.

D. Unpaved Areas - In unpaved areas, the top of vaults and pull box covers shall be approximately 2 inches above finished grade.

E. Joint Seals - Section joints of pre-cast vaults and pull boxes shall be sealed with compound as recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction - Trenching, backfilling and compaction shall be as specified in Section 02200 - Excavation and Backfill.

END OF SECTION 260544

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1516
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 262416 - 1
Panelboards and Distribution Panels
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The work of this Section consists of providing panelboards and circuit breakers as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work in this Section.

1. 260519 Line Voltage Wire and Cable

2. 260526 Grounding

3. 262816 Circuit Breakers

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop Drawings - As specified in Division 01 and Section 26 05 00. For each panelboard and distribution panel furnished under this Contract, submit manufacturer's name, catalog data, and the following information:

1. Panelboard / distribution panel type.

2. Main bus and terminal connection sizes.

3. Location of line connections.

4. Cabinet dimension.

5. Gutter space.

6. Gauge of boxes and fronts.

7. Finish data.

8. Voltage rating.

9. Breaker manufacturer, types, trip rating, and interrupting ratings.

10. When information is available on the Drawings, show breaker circuit numbers and locations along with trip ratings on a panelboard layout.

B. Single Submittal - A single complete submittal is required for all products covered by this Section.

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit operation and maintenance data for panelboards and circuit breakers including nameplate data, parts lists, factory and field test reports, recommended maintenance procedures and typewritten as-built panel schedules. Submit in accordance with Division 01.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1517
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 262416 - 2
Panelboards and Distribution Panels
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

2.1 PANELBOARDS:

A. General: Lighting and Receptacle Panelboards shall be the automatic circuit breaker type. The number and arrangement of circuits, trip ratings, spares and blank spaces for future circuit breakers shall be as shown on the Drawings or, if not shown, 42 circuits. All circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, bolt-on type (unless otherwise noted on drawings), with 1, 2 or 3 poles a shown, each with a single operating handle. Tandem or piggyback breakers shall not be used.

B. Nameplates:

1. Each panelboard shall have a field mounted identifying, rigid, plastic nameplate giving the panel identification as shown on the Drawings.

2. Each panelboard shall have a manufacturer's nameplate showing the voltage, bus rating, number of phases, frequency and number of wires.

C. Construction:

1. Door and trim shall be finished to match finish type and color of surrounding wall. Box shall be hot-dip galvanized, and field finished to match the front.

2. Panelboards and enclosures shall conform to requirements of all relevant codes.

Panelboards shall be suitable for use as service equipment.

3. Panelboards shall be furnished with hinged trim fronts with key latch and a typed directory card and holder. Panelboard circuits shall be arranged with odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the right. Provide weatherproof, NEMA type 3R enclosures for outdoor installation.

D. Busbars: Panelboard busbars shall be phase sequence type suitable for bolt-on circuit breakers.

All busbars shall be copper.

E. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be the molded case type with trip and interrupting ratings as shown on the Drawings.

F. Manufacturer:

1. Panelboard manufacturer shall be Square D, Siemens, General Electric, or Eaton Cutler Hammer. Panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer as the switchboard.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELS:

A. General: Distribution panels shall be the automatic circuit breaker type. The number and arrangement of circuits, trip ratings, spares and blank spaces for future circuit breakers shall be as shown on the Drawings. All circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermalmagnetic bolt-on type, with 1, 2 or 3 poles a shown, each with a single operating handle. Tandem or piggy-back breakers shall not be used.

B. Nameplates:

1. Each distribution panel shall have a field mounted, identifying, rigid, plastic nameplate giving the panel identification as shown on the Drawings.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1518
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 262416 - 3
Panelboards and Distribution Panels
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

2. Each distribution panel shall have a manufacturer's nameplate showing the voltage, bus rating, number of phases, frequency and number of wires.

C. Construction:

1. Door and trim shall be finished to match color of surrounding wall. Box shall be hot-dip galvanized, field finished to match the front.

2. Distribution panels and enclosures shall conform to requirements of all relevant codes.

Distribution panels shall be suitable for use as service.

3. Distribution panels shall have a front door with key latch and a typed directory card and permanently attached holder. Adhesive backed holders are not acceptable. Distribution panels circuits shall be arranged with odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the right.

Provide weatherproof, NEMA type 3R enclosures for outdoor installation.

D. Busbars: Distribution panels busbars shall be phase sequence type suitable for bolt-on circuit breakers. All busbars shall be copper, sized for a maximum current density of 1000A psi.

E. Circuit Breakers:

1. Circuit breakers shall be the molded case type with trip and interrupting ratings as shown on the Drawings.

2. Circuit breakers equipped with Ground-Fault Equipment Protection shall be capable of the following types of ground-fault protection: residual, source ground return, and modified differential.
a. Ground-fault settings for circuit breaker sensor sizes 1200 A or below shall be adjustable from 0.2 to 1.0 times in in 0.1 In increments. The ground-fault settings for circuit breakers above 1200 A shall be adjustable from 500 to 1200 A.

3. Circuit breakers with an arc Energy-Reducing Maintenance Switch (ERMS) setting shall be equipped with a separate trip curve to reduce incident energy. a. The ERMS trip curve shall be selected through physical selector. Trip unit [remote indicator light] shall indicate when trip unit is operating in ERMS mode. b. Trip unit shall operate in Fast Instantaneous trip mode, 25 to 30 mS, when ERMS trip curve is active.
c. Engaging/disengaging the ERMS mode or making settings changes to the ERMS settings shall be restricted to authorized personnel by limiting access to such features by padlocks or passwords to ensure safety of the personnel working with the equipment.

F. Manufacturer:

4. Distribution panel manufacturer shall be Square D, Siemens, [I.E.M], [General Electric], [or] [Eaton Cutler Hammer]. [Distribution panels shall be of the same manufacturer as the switchboard.]
PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION: Panelboards and Distribution Panels shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1519
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 262416 - 4
Panelboards and Distribution Panels
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Panelboards and Distribution Panels shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Circuit breakers for solidly grounded Wye Electrical Systems of more than 150V to Ground and 1000A or larger shall be equipped with Ground-Fault Equipment Protection.

C. Circuit breakers 1200A and larger shall be equipped with a separate trip curve for an arc EnergyReducing Maintenance Switch (ERMS) setting to reduce incident energy.

3.3 MOUNTING:

D. Panelboards and Distribution Panels shall be mounted with the top of the box 6'-6" above the floor. Panelboards and Distribution Panels shall be plumb within 1/8-inch. The highest breaker operating handle shall not be higher than 72 inches above the floor.

3.4 FIELD TESTS:

A. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on circuits with #2 AWG and larger conductors to be energized with a line-to-neutral voltage of 120 volts or more. Make these tests after all equipment has been connected, except that equipment which may be damaged by the test voltage shall not be connected. Test the insulation with a 500Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The insulation resistance shall be 2 megohms or more. Submit results for review.

B. Grounding: Grounding shall conform to Section 26 05 26.

C. Continuity: Panelboard and Distribution Panel circuits shall be tested for continuity prior to energizing. Continuity tests shall be conducted using a dc device with a bell or buzzer.

END OF SECTION 262416

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1520
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 262726- 1
Devices Wiring
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
SECTION 262726 - DEVICES WIRING
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work of this section consists of:

1. Furnishing, installing, and connecting all duplex receptacles complete with wall plates and/or covers, as shown on the Drawings.

2. Furnishing, installing and connecting all light switches complete with wall plates and or handle operators, as shown on the Drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work of this section:

1. 26 05 42 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings.

2. 26 05 19 Line Voltage Wire and Cable.

3. 26 05 33 Junction and Pull Boxes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS: As specified in Section 26 05 00 and Division 01.

A. Submit manufacturers published descriptive literature properly marked to identify the items to be supplied.

B. A single complete submittal is required for all products covered by this Section.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Receptacles:

A. General - Receptacles shall be heavy duty, high abuse, grounding type.

B. [Tamper Resistant] Duplex Receptacles:

1. Receptacles shall be specification grade, rated 20 ampere, two-pole, 3-wire, 125 volt, NEMA 5-20 configuration, self-grounding with screw terminals. Color shall be as selected by the Architect.

2. Devices shall have a nylon face, back and side wired.

3. Manufacturer: Hubbell #DR20 Series [Hubbell #DR20_ _ TR], Leviton #16352 Series [Leviton # 16352-TRE _ _ Series].

C. GFCI Receptacles [Tamper Resistant]:

1. Device shall be rated 20 ampere, 2-pole, 3-wire, 120 volts, conforming to NEMA 5-20 configuration. Face shall be nylon composition. Unit shall have an LED type red indicator light, test and reset push buttons. Color shall be as selected by the Architect.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1521
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 262726- 2
Devices Wiring
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

2. GFCI component shall meet UL 943 Class A standards with a tripping time of 1/40 second at 5 milliamperes current unbalance. Operating range shall extend from -31F to 158F. Unit shall have transient voltage protection and shall be ceramic encapsulated for protection against moisture.

3. Manufacturer: Hubbell #GF20_ _LA Series [Hubbell # GFTR20 _ _ Series], Leviton #GFNT2 Series [Leviton #GFTR2 Series].

D. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles:

1. Device shall be rated 20 ampere, 2-pole, 3-wire, 120 volt, conforming to NEMA 5-20 configuration, Face shall be nylon composition. Unit shall have a LED type red indicator light, test and reset push buttons. Color shall be as selected by the architect.

2. GFCI component shall meet UL 943 Class A standards with a tripping time of 1/40 second at 5 milliamperes current unbalance. Operating range shall extend from -31F to 158F. Unit shall have transient voltage protection and shall be ceramic encapsulated for protection against moisture.

3. Manufacturer: Hubbell #GFTR20 _ _ Series, Leviton #GFWR2 Series.

E. Surge Suppression Receptacles:

1. Device shall be rated 20 ampere, 2-pole, 3-wire, 120 volts. Face shall be nylon composition.

Unit shall have an LED type "Power-on" indication light and damage-alert audible alarm.

Color shall be as selected by the Architect.

2. Surge suppression protection shall be listed to UL standard 1449 and shall instantly absorb a transient surge of 6,000 volts minimum. A minimum of four (4) Metal Oxide Varistors shall be utilized to absorb transients.

3. Manufacturer: Hubbell #HBL8362S Series, Leviton #8380 Series.

2.2 SWITCHES:

A. Switches shall be rated 20 amperes to 120/277 volts ac. Units shall be flush mounted, selfgrounding, quiet operating rocker devices. Rocker color shall be as selected by the Architect.

1. Manufacturer: Hubbell #DS_20_ _ Series, Leviton #5621 Series. See plans for single pole, three way and four-way requirements.

B. Timed switches: Shall be as designed by Paragon Electric Company # ET2000f or Watt Stopper TS-400 rated for the voltage specified on drawings. Time-out shall be adjustable from 5 minutes up to 12 hours. Unit shall be provided with warning alarm.

C. Dimmer switches: Switch shall be a specified-on drawings, color per architect. Heat fins shall not be removed, where dimmer switches are ganged together, care shall be taken to install correct size backbox to accommodate switches without removing fins.

2.3 PLATES:

A. General - Plates shall be of the style and color to match the wiring devices, and of the required number of gangs. Plates shall conform with NEMA WD 1, UL 514 and FS W-P-455A. Plates on

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1522
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 262726- 3
Devices Wiring
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
finished walls shall be non-metallic or stainless steel. Plates on unfinished walls and on fittings shall be of zinc plated steel or case metal and shall have rounded corners and beveled edges.

B. Non-Metallic: Plates shall be plain with beveled edges and shall be nylon or reinforced fiberglass.

C. Stainless Steel: Plates shall be .040 inches thick with beveled edges and shall be manufactured from No. 430 alloy having a brushed or satin finish.

D. Cast Metal: Plates shall be cast or malleable iron covers with gaskets so as to be moisture resistant or weatherproof.

E. Blank Plates: Cover plates for future telephone outlets shall match adjacent device wall plates in appearance and construction.

F. Weatherproof Plate: Cover plates in wet and damp locations shall have recessed in-use covers, Taymac or equal. Back box shall be suitable for the wall material where it is installed.

G. Labeling: All switch and receptacle plates shall be labeled on the top portion of the plate with the panelboard and circuit number serving that device. Lettering shall be 3/16” minimum high, black color, on clear Mylar 3/8” tape. Manufactured by P-touch or equal.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

2.3 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES:

A. Interior Locations: In finished walls, install each device in a flush mounted box with washers as required to bring the device mounting strap level with the surface of the finished wall. On unfinished walls, surface mount boxes level and plumb.

B. Mounting Heights: Adjust boxes so that the front edge of the box shall not be farther back from the finished wall plane than 1/4-inch. Adjust boxes so that they do not project beyond the finished wall. Height of device shall be as follows unless otherwise noted on the drawings:

1. Receptacles 15 Inches from finished floor to bottom of box.

2. Toggle Switches 48 Inches from finished floor to top of box.

C. Receptacles:

1. Ground each receptacle using a grounding conductor, not a yoke or screw contact.

2. Install receptacles with connections spliced to the branch circuit wiring in such a way that removal of the receptacle will not disrupt neutral continuity and branch circuit power will not be lost to other receptacles in the same circuit.

2.4 INSTALLATION OF WALL PLATES:

A. General - Plates shall match the style of the device and shall be plumb within 1/16-inch of the vertical or horizontal.

B. Interior Locations, Finished Walls: Install non-metallic plates so that all four edges are in continuous contact with the finished wall surfaces. Plaster filling will not be permitted. Do not use oversized plates or sectional plates.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1523
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 262726- 4
Devices Wiring
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
C. Interior (not wet) Locations, Unfinished Walls: Install stainless steel or cast metal cover plates.

D. Wet Locations: Install cast metal plates with gaskets on wiring devices in such a manner as to provide a rain tight weatherproof installation. Cover shall be [lockable] outdoor “in use” type.

E. Future Locations: Install blanking cover plates on all unused outlets.

3.3 TESTS:

A. Receptacles:

1. After installation of receptacles, energize circuits and test each receptacle to detect lack of ground continuity, reversed polarity, and open neutral condition.

END OF SECTION 262726

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1524
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 262816 - 1
Circuit Breakers
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
SECTION 262816 - CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The work of this Section consists of providing circuit breakers as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK: See the following Specification Sections for work related to the work in this Section.

A. 26 05 00 General Electrical Requirements
B. 26 24 16 Panelboards and Distribution Panels

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop Drawings - Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 260500 and Division 01. For each circuit breaker furnished under this Contract, submit manufacturer's name, catalog data, and the following information:

1. Terminal connection sizes.

2. Voltage rating.

3. Breaker manufacturer, types, trip ratings and interrupting ratings.

B. Single Submittal - A single complete submittal is required for all products covered by this Section.

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with and Section 260500, operation and maintenance data for circuit breakers including nameplate data, parts lists, manufacturer's circuit breaker timer, current, coordination curves, factory and field test reports and recommended maintenance procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CIRCUIT BREAKER: Each circuit breaker shall consist of the following:

A. A molded case breaker with an over center toggle-type mechanism, providing quick-make, quickbreak action. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Multipole circuit breakers shall have variable magnetic trip elements which are set by a single adjustment to assure uniform tripping characteristics in each pole. Circuit breakers shall be of the bolt-on type unless otherwise noted.

B. Breaker shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40C.

C. Each circuit breaker shall have trip indication by handle position and shall be trip-free.

D. Three pole breakers shall be common trip.

E. The circuit breakers shall be constructed to accommodate the supply connection at either end of the circuit breaker. Circuit breaker shall be suitable for mounting and operation in any position.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1525
AURUM 100% Submittal / Bid Set 262816 - 2
Circuit Breakers
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
F. Breakers shall be rated as shown on Drawings.

G. Circuit breaker and/or Fuse/circuit breaker combinations for series connected interrupting ratings shall be listed by UL as recognized component combinations for use in the end use equipment in which it is installed. Any series rated combination used shall be marked on the end use equipment per CEC section 110-22.

H. Breakers shall be UL listed. Circuit breakers shall have removable lugs.

I. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors.

J. Breakers shall be UL listed for installation of mechanical screw type lugs.

K. Circuit breakers serving HACR rated loads shall be HACR type. Circuit breakers serving other motor loads shall be motor rated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MOUNTING:

A. The highest breaker operating handle shall not be higher than 72 inches above the floor.

END OF SECTION 262816

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1526

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 1 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
SECTION 265113 - ARCHITECTURAL LUMINAIRES, SOURCES AND COMPONENTS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Contract Drawings, conditions of Contract (including General Conditions, Addendum to the General Conditions, Special Conditions, Division 01 Specification Sections and all other Contract Documents) apply to the work of this Section.

B. Related Sections: Division 26 is related to this Section C. Related Appendices Luminaire Schedule and Catalogue Extracts are attached as appendices to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Included in the Work of this Section are labor, materials, and appurtenances required to complete the Work of this Section, as specified herein, as required by job conditions, or as indicated on drawings. The scope of this section includes general requirements for luminaires and their components, coordination, definitions, quality assurances, submittals, mockups, samples and general responsibility for a complete job.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. In this specification, the term "Architect" includes the Architect, Interior Designer, Landscape Architect, Construction Manager, Owner's representative and/or the Lighting Specifier, together or individually as they shall decide.

B. The term "luminaires" refers to lighting fixtures with their integrated light sources and all other components.

C. The use of the word "Approved" shall not extend the Architect's responsibilities beyond that as defined in the General Conditions.

1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide labor, materials, and equipment for the installation of indoor and outdoor luminaires, lighting equipment, control wiring, and sources as shown on the drawings and specified herein and in Related Sections. Luminaires shall be securely attached to supports.

B. Refer to architectural drawings for locations, dimensions and details, and electrical documents for quantities. Check and verify dimensions and details on drawings before proceeding with the Work. Report any inconsistencies or discrepancies. Should it appear that the Work intended is not sufficiently detailed or explained on the drawings or in the specifications, apply for further drawings or explanations, as may be necessary. Conform to these explanations in the work. If any question arises about the true meaning of the drawings or specifications, provide timely and written questions before proceeding. Under no circumstances shall any request for extra

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1527

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 2 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
compensation be honored where the basis of claim is such a clarification. In no case submit a bid or proceed on any Work with uncertainty. The intention of this specification and the accompanying or applicable drawings is to provide a job complete in every respect. Contractor is responsible for this result.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Luminaire locations and mounting heights as indicated on the electrical drawings are generalized and approximate. Carefully verify locations and mounting heights with Architect's drawings, reflected ceiling plans, interior elevations and other reference data prior to installation. Check for adequacy of headroom and non-interference with other equipment, such as ducts, pipes or openings. Provide timely and written notification of such conflicts before proceeding with the Work. Although the location of equipment included in the Work of this Section may be shown on the Contract Drawings in a certain place, actual construction may disclose that the location for the Work does not make its position easily and quickly accessible. In such cases, provide timely and written notification of this situation before installing this Work, and comply with installation directions.

B. Clearly indicate the Work to be performed by other trades' contractors, and the materials that are adjacent to or abutting the Work of this Section. Coordinate as required. Give ample notice of special openings required for placing equipment in the building, in order to avoid cutting of completed Work. Provide the materials and labor for Work included under this Section in ample time, and in sufficient quantities so that all of the Work may be installed in proper sequence to avoid unnecessary cutting of the floors and walls. Schedule the Work to prevent Work of this Section being damaged by other construction operations. Remove and replace Work so damaged at no cost to the project. Coordinate and schedule the Work of this Section with the Work of other Sections and Utility Companies so that there shall be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part of each respective Work. Construction Work shall proceed in its natural sequence without unnecessary delay caused by the Work of this Section.

C. Coordinate with other contractors regarding attachment to or openings in the materials of other trades such as pre-cast concrete, ornamental metals, or wood panels for recessed junction boxes, and other equipment.

D. Arrange the installation in proper relation to other Work and with architectural finishes so that it shall harmonize in service and appearance and so that there shall be no interference with the Work of others, including interference in location or level.

E. Where a catalog number and a narrative or pictorial description are provided, the written description shall take precedence and prevail.

F. Where Work of this Section is to be flush or concealed, install it to assure that it does not project visually or physically beyond the finished lines of floors, ceilings or walls.

G. Verify ceiling conditions and provide appropriate mounting details for each luminaire. Submit mounting details for approval.

H. Become familiarized with all equipment listed in the luminaire schedule and take responsibility for the successful completion of the entire lighting installation.

I. Verify compatibility of supply voltage indicated on electrical drawings with voltage specified for each luminaire prior to release. Provide timely and written notification of any and all discrepancies.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1528

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 3 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCES
A. Contractor shall comply with the General Requirements related to Quality Control, in addition to the provisions herein
B. Manufacturers: Manufacturers listed in the APPENDIX – LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE (lighting fixture schedule) herein, shall be assumed capable of supplying the listed luminaires unless exceptions are set forth in their quotations. Provide timely and written notification of any such exceptions.

Acceptable manufacturers are listed in the luminaire schedule. Acceptable manufacturers shall be capable of providing proof of satisfactory production of luminaires of the type and quality shown for a period of at least five years.

C. Statement of Application:

1. By commencing the Work of this Section, the Contractor assumes overall responsibility, as a part of the warranty of the Work, to ensure that assemblies, components and parts shown or required within the Work of this Section, comply with the Contract Documents.

2. Warranty: In addition to any warranties required by the General Requirements, the Contractor of the Work of this section shall:
a. For a period of one year after Owner's initial acceptance and establishment of the beginning date of the warranty period, and at no additional cost, promptly provide and install replacements for luminaires or components thereof which are defective in materials or workmanship under normal operating conditions, except for sources; or successfully repair installed equipment at the job site. For any time during the warranty period that luminaires are not fully functional due to defects in materials or workmanship, provide or pay for and install and remove suitable and adequate temporary luminaires. Warrant replacement luminaires or components to be free of defects in workmanship or materials for a period of one year following replacement and replace any defective replacements.
b. Contractor shall not be held responsible for acts of vandalism or for abnormal or accidental abuse of the luminaires or their components occurring after the beginning of the warranty period, nor shall Contractor be held responsible for deleterious effects caused by maintenance procedures performed without the concurrence of Contractor.

D. Equipment Compatibility:

1. For all similar luminaire type, provide luminaires, power supplies, LED drivers, ballasts and other components fabricated or supplied by a single manufacturer, to simplify maintenance and replacement of equipment. Under no circumstances shall sources of the same type, even if different wattages, be supplied by more than one manufacturer unless operable samples are submitted, reviewed and approved in writing.

2. Luminaire details shown may be modified by the manufacturer provided all of the following conditions have been met:
a. Luminaire performance is equal or improved.
b. Structural, mechanical, electrical, safety, and maintenance characteristics are equal or improved.
c. Cost to the Owner is reduced or equal.
d. No conformance to codes has been compromised.
e. No performance criteria for, LEED, or WELL Building ratings has been compromised.
f. Modifications have been reviewed and approved in writing.

E. Regulatory Agencies:

1. Provide luminaires constructed, wired and installed in compliance with the current edition of applicable city, state and national codes. Provide luminaires conforming to or exceeding

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1529

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 4 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards, and to provisions of applicable codes which exceed those standards.

2. For any category of luminaire tested by any of the following labs, provide luminaires listed and labeled by an independent Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as

UL, ETL, CSA, MET

3. In addition, provide luminaires which conform to additional regulations necessary to obtain approval for use of specified luminaires in locations shown. Use only electrical components listed by the above NRTLs.

F. Recognized Standards: In addition to standards that may be referenced in Division 01 Specification Sections, luminaires shall comply with the applicable standards of the following organizations.

1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

2. National Electrical Code (NEC)

3. Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM)

4. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES)

5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

8. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

9. National Electrical Safety Code (IEEE C2)

10. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

1.7 BIDDING
A. Follow bidding procedures as described in Division 01 of this specification.

B. Provide specified and alternate unit prices separated from installation costs as required in APPENDIX - LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE (the lighting fixture schedule).

1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Luminaires included under this Section are specified by approved manufacturer and type. Provide equipment exactly as specified, unless substitutions are mutually agreed upon, as follows:

1. Submit a written request for luminaires proposed for substitution, at least two weeks before the end of bid period – the “substitution period”. Make the request for substitution an alternate, separate proposal, accompanied by complete descriptive and technical data.

Indicate if there is any addition or deduction from the base bid. Substitutions proposed after this time, or not including proper documentation shall not be considered. Submissions of substitutions may be accepted or rejected without explanation.

2. Exceptions: During the construction period, no substitutions shall be considered unless compelling reasons are given - such as a specified product no longer being available. If Contractor has failed to follow the schedule presented under the Paragraph titled "Submittals" below, no substitutions will be allowed based on inability of specified manufacturer to meet delivery schedule, and the Contractor shall provide luminaires exactly as specified without delay to the project and without additional cost to Owner.

3. Substitutions shall be indicated as such in the bid documents, and operable (plug-in) samples, catalogue cuts and complete photometric reports by independent testing laboratories submitted. A complete comparison of the performance of the proposed substitution in relation to the performance of at least the first named specified product shall be included. In addition, for any luminaire type of which six (6) or more of the luminaires are to be used, submit computer generated point-by-point calculations for illumination on vertical and horizontal planes. Such calculations shall include either the typical mounting

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1530

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 5 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
condition for the subject luminaire or a specialized mounting condition deemed critical for the success of the design.

4. Written documentation shall clearly show that the proposed manufacturer complies with each and every aspect of the specification and/or indicate any exceptions or variations.

Where proposed substitutions alter the functional or visual design or change the space requirements or mounting details indicated herein or on the drawings, such changes shall be detailed in the proposal and costs indicated for revised design and construction for trades involved. Cost data shall be provided as called for in the General Requirements.

Submittal shall include names and addresses of at least three (3) similar projects on which the product was used, including names and phone numbers of specifiers and owners of each project, and dates of installation.

B. Value Engineering:

1. To the extent that Value Engineering is allowed in the General Requirements, the procedure for value engineering is the same as outlined above regarding the substitution process, with the words "value engineering proposed substitution(s)" replacing the word "substitution(s)". Value engineering submittals shall be clearly separated from substitutions, and line-item cost savings for each proposed luminaire type clearly documented.

1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. General:

1. For standard catalog items with no modifications, submit catalog cut sheets prepared by the manufacturer which clearly show all elements to be supplied and all corresponding product data (including sources, manufacturer and model number of power supply, LED driver, ballast, and other components, as well as voltage; accessories, options and any miscellaneous items detailed in the written description of the specification.) If cut sheet shows more than one (1) luminaire type, all non-applicable information shall be crossed out.

2. For custom luminaires, modified luminaires or linear luminaires mounted in continuous rows, submit a layout drawing prepared by the manufacturer showing all details of construction, lengths of runs, source layout, if applicable, suspension installation hardware or components, power locations, remote power supplies, remote LED drivers, remote transformers, finishes and list of materials. Drawings must be to scale. Provide manufacturer with field dimensions where required. If scallop shields, wallwash reflectors or baffles are required, drawings shall indicate relative position to wall or adjacent vertical surface.

3. When components are indicated as contractor supplied or specified (i.e. remote power supplies, remote LED drivers, ballast housings, NEMA enclosures, etc., provide submittals for components in conjunction with the luminaire submittal.

4. Provide submittals with luminaire installation instruction sheets.

B. Submittal Schedule (Note: All days, week or months listed are "calendar" days, weeks or months, and not working days, weeks or months):

1. List of Intended Manufacturers: Within fifteen (15) calendar days of the Notice to Proceed, submit a List of Intended Manufacturers, with estimated fabrication lead times. "Lead times" shall be measured in weeks, beginning from the manufacturer's receipt of approved shop drawings and release, and ending at shipment. The response to this list will indicate if any manufacturers are unacceptable.

2. Acknowledgments and standard shop drawings: Within twenty (20) days after receipt of the response to the list of Intended Manufacturers, submit copies of purchase orders and manufacturers' acknowledgments for all luminaires specified, conforming to responses.

The purchase orders and the manufacturer’s acknowledgments need not list prices, but

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1531
HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 6 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
shall contain a guaranteed fabrication lead time, in weeks, as defined above. These fabrication times shall be adequate for the timely completion of the job. At the same time, but not less than twenty-four (24) weeks before standard manufactured luminaires are required on the site, submit shop drawings for all standard luminaires or those with minor modifications.

3. Custom Shop Drawings: In order to allow for mockups and independent testing for all custom luminaires or those with major modifications, submit complete shop drawings within sixty (60) days after the Notice to Proceed, but not less than eleven (11) months prior to the time they are required on the site.

4. Release for fabrication: Within twenty (20) days after receipt of shop drawings marked "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted", release luminaires for fabrication and forward verification that the luminaires have been released for fabrication, with a guaranteed shipment date for each specified luminaire. At the same time, forward finish or component samples, tests, or any outstanding data required for approval.

5. Operable luminaire samples and mockups as indicated in APPENDIX - LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE (the lighting fixture schedule) shall be received by the designated parties, or installed on the site, within forty-five (45) days after Contractor's receipt of shop drawings marked "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted".

6. Re-submissions: Within fourteen (14) days after receipt of shop drawings marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected", resubmit revised shop drawings in accordance with the General Requirements regarding re-submissions.

7. Provide written notification of any potential scheduling problems, or of any submittals that have not been returned which are required to maintain the installation schedule. Such notification shall be in a timely manner and well in advance of the time such delay might affect the fabrication schedule or appropriate delivery of luminaires.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings for each type of luminaire, arranged in order of lighting type designation except where specified luminaires are standard, unmodified, "off-the-shelf" units, fully described by catalogue cuts. If comprehensive, such catalogue cuts may be substituted for shop drawings, however full shop drawing shall be submitted upon request.

Submit catalogue cuts of individual lamps or replaceable source modules to be provided for each luminaire. Submit shop drawings in the quantity and format called for in the General Requirements.

2. Shop drawings shall show all luminaire components, including but not limited to lampholders, reflectors, louvers, lenses, fuses, junction boxes, power supplies, ballasts and sources. Shop drawings shall show materials, finishes, metal gauges, overall and detailed dimensions, sizes, electrical and mechanical connections, fasteners, welds, joints, any exposed hardware, and conditions, or provisions for the work of others, and similar information. Indicate complete details of the luminaire, including manufacturer's name and catalogue numbers for sockets, power supplies, LED drivers, ballasts, light shields, switches and type of wiring, and targeting and locking devices for adjustable luminaires.

Indicate that source type specified is appropriate for luminaire design. Indicate maximum allowed distance between light luminaire and remote power supply. Indicate type and extent of approved inert insulating materials to prevent electrolytic corrosion at junctions of dissimilar metals. Include pertinent mounting details including hung ceiling construction.

Standard catalogue cuts shall be supplemented by additional drawings if information or descriptions listed above are not included in the cuts. Photometric documentation and finish samples shall be provided upon request. Samples shall be provided if indicated in APPENDIX - LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE (the lighting fixture schedule). No luminaires will be approved without the previous described submission of data. Submissions may be modified during the submission review process. Luminaires or other materials shall not be fabricated, shipped, stored or installed unless prior written approval has been received.

3. Submit layouts for continuous luminaires or coves, indicating overall field measurements and proposed lengths, and condition of joints, corners, ends and any unlighted lengths.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1532

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 7 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

4. Submit catalogue cuts for all lamps, power supplies, LED drivers, ballasts and emergency battery backup power supplies and ballasts.

D. Data: Submit independent laboratory photometric data in the directed number of copies and in format as directed. Photometric data shall be submitted for standard, "off-the-shelf" units at the time the manufacturer's cuts are submitted. Photometric testing and reporting shall conform to IESNA procedures. Submit additional photometric testing as required by Luminaire Schedule or upon request.

E. Manufacturer's Catalogue Sheets shall indicate input watts and electrical characteristics, ambient temperature rating, noise level rating, mounting methods and UL or ETL listing for use with required source, power supply, LED driver, transformer, lamp and/or ballast (if any).

1.10 SAMPLES
A. After shop drawings, data and any other required submissions have been approved, submit samples of each of the following components upon request:

1. Samples demonstrating the finishes of any custom metal, paint color or finish. Sample size to be a minimum of 4in (100mm) square. Place labels on the back side of finish samples only.

2. Material samples of any transmitting media, such as plastic, glass, perforated metal and the like. Sample size to be a minimum of 12in (305mm) square, to allow adequate space for label.

3. Each downlight reflector cone that differs in size or finish.

4. Any other luminaires or components requested in the luminaire descriptions, schedule, or in the contract documents.

B. Submit two (2) samples unless otherwise indicated. If luminaire samples are requested, supply a completely operable luminaire as specified in the Luminaire Schedule and/or incorporating responses to shop drawing, with the specified source and a 10ft (3m) cord and plug for standard 120-volt service. For 277-volt luminaires, also supply a completely wired or plug-wired step-up transformer to convert from 120 to 277 volts, with a 120-volt cord and plug. Provide component parts as specifically requested.

C. Where a sample is submitted or requested, do not fabricate that luminaire type until the sample is approved. Submit and resubmit a sample as required, until samples are approved.

D. The purpose of the sample is to review manufacturing techniques, detailing, light source, and scale. Minor modifications, if any, shall be considered part of these Specifications and shall be accomplished at no additional cost.

E. Submit complete and operable sample luminaires for any proposed substitution or value engineering proposal as indicated above. There shall be no expectation that substitution products or samples received after the substitution period will be accepted or reviewed.

F. Provide samples as called for in the General Requirements. Tag samples with the name of the project, referenced specification, paragraph or drawing number, the luminaire type number and any other identifying data. Ship the samples to two separate addresses as requested. After review, the samples shall be shipped to the project site for use as standards. All transportation charges for samples shall be paid by Contractor. Make luminaires supplied under the Work of this Section identical with approved samples. Do not install any sample luminaires in the project.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1533

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 8 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
G. If sample submissions are not approved, samples shall be returned to Contractor, at Contractor's expense. Upon receipt of sample disapproval, immediately make a new submission of samples meeting the comments and contract requirements, as called for in the General Requirements.

1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Luminaires and their component elements shall be delivered to the job site factory-assembled and wired to the greatest extent practical, in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings, samples, certificates and catalogue cuts, and shall be handled in a careful manner to avoid damage.

B. Exposed finishes shall be protected during fabrication, transport, storage and handling. Delivered materials shall be identical to the approved samples. Materials which become damaged shall be repaired and/or replaced as directed.

C. Luminaires shall be stored under cover, above the ground, in clean, dry areas, and shall be tagged and/or marked as to type and location.

D. Delivered luminaires shall include wiring, sockets, power supplies, LED drivers, ballasts, shielding, channels, lenses and other parts and appurtenances necessary for luminaire installation of each luminaire type.

1.12 MOCK-UP
A. As a part of the Work of this Section, when specifically called for in the Luminaire Schedule, and at no additional cost to project, temporarily install, connect and adjust a reasonable number of luminaires, three (3) unless otherwise stated. Install completely operable luminaires with all sources, power supplies, LED drivers, ballasts, etc., of each type listed in the Luminaire Schedule where a mock-up is specified, to verify the specified catalogue number and requirements. Place the mock-up luminaires where and when directed. Remove and store mock-up luminaires, when approved, as necessary to complete the work, at Contractor's expense.

1. The mock-up installation shall closely conform to the conditions of the actual installation as to height, distance from ceiling, light source type, output and performance, number and type of sources, material, color, and space finishes, etc. Submit a written description of each proposed mock-up with drawings to obtain approval prior to commencement of each mock-up.

2. Where mounting of mockup may negatively impact existing conditions or constructed scope of Work, temporary mounting methods shall be implemented to avoid any damage.

3. The purpose of the mock-up will be to study the general appearance and performance of the intended lighting systems unless otherwise indicated. At that time, certain minimal test variations may be requested as to lamp location, source type, reflector shape, color, etc.

Final modifications, if any, shall be considered as part of these Specifications and shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide materials, equipment, appurtenances and workmanship for the Work of this Section conforming to the highest commercial standards, as specified and indicated on the drawings.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1534

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 9 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
Make luminaire parts and components not specifically identified or indicated on the drawings, of materials most appropriate to their use or function, and resistant to corrosion and to thermal and mechanical stresses encountered in the normal application and function of the luminaires.

B. Provide recessed luminaires that are constructed to be suitable for and compatible with the ceiling, wall, pavement or other materials and construction in which they will be installed.

C. Named manufacturers, when listed in the luminaire schedule, are representative of an adequate level of quality and reputation, and are allowed to submit a product, provided that they are capable of satisfying the provisions of the specifications in every respect. This does not mean that any standard product provided by that manufacturer is automatically qualified. Manufacturers not on this list may be proposed during the substitution period if they can substantiate that their product meets every particular of the relevant specification, and are of comparable quality, experience and reputation. See the paragraph titled "Substitutions", above. Any submitted product may be rejected without explanation.

2.2 DEFINITIONS:

A. CCT: Correlated Color Temperature
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index
C. Fixture: See “Luminaire”
D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating E. LED: Light Emitting Diode
F. Lumen: Measured output of source and luminaire or both G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including source, gear, reflector and housing

2.3 MARKING OF LUMINAIRES
A. Luminaires shall be equipped with markings showing safety specifications, construction safeguards, and minimum resistance to hazard sources operation under fault conditions. Marking shall include manufacturer/distributor’s name, related voltage or voltage range, rated wattage, light output, optical distribution and rated frequency. LED luminaires not suitable for dimming control are required to indicate this clearly in installation instructions or package labelling. Mark luminaires with replaceable sources according to proper source type. Provide markings that are clear and that are located to be readily visible to service personnel, but invisible from normal viewing angles when sources are in place.

2.4 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Provide luminaires completely factory-assembled and wired and equipped with necessary sockets, power supplies, LED drivers, ballasts, wiring, shielding, reflectors, channels, lenses, integral emergency battery packs (if required) and other parts and appurtenances necessary.

Deliver to project site ready for installation and to complete the luminaire installation.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1535

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 10 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
B. Use only completely concealed hardware, unless otherwise noted. Latching of luminaire door frames shall be unobtrusive. Make luminaire free from light leaks by the inherent design of the luminaire body and frame. Bond gaskets, when used, to the luminaire metal. Weld power supply support studs, socket saddle studs and reflector support studs to luminaire body. Flexible leads shall enter luminaires at sides, unless otherwise noted.

C. Minimum gauges sheet steel: 22-gauge for recessed LED, unless thicker gauge required by regulating agency; unless otherwise specified.

D. Construct luminaires with the minimum number of joints. Make unexposed joints by approved method such as welding, brazing, screwing or bolting. Soldered joints are not acceptable.

E. Provide metallic cast or extruded parts of luminaires that are close grained, sound, and free from imperfections or discoloration. Provide cast or extruded parts that are rigid, true to pattern, and of ample weight and thickness. Provide cast or extruded parts that are properly fitted, filed, ground, and buffed finished surfaces and joints free of imperfections. Make thickness on cast parts not less than 1/8in (3mm).

F. Provide housings that make electrical components easily accessible and replaceable, without removing the luminaire body from its mounting.

G. Provide luminaires indicated as "continuous" on drawings or specifications with finished end-toend or wall-to-wall appearance. Verify run lengths per field conditions prior to ordering. Maximize lighted length to nearest six inches (152mm), with equally spaced unlighted portions at each end, not to exceed 3 inches (76mm) each. Provide continuous louvers and/or lenses into unlighted ends and at corners.

H. Wiring:

1. Provide luminaire wiring between sources, lampholders and associated operating and starting equipment in compliance with UL 1570 and NEC, UL 8750 for LED’s.

2. Make connections of wires to terminals of sources, lampholders and other accessories in a neat and workmanlike manner and which are electrically and mechanically secure, with no loose strands protruding. Provide of the appropriate amount of wires extending to or from the terminals of a source, lampholder or other accessory. These wires shall not be in excess of the number which the accessory is designed to accommodate.

3. Provide wiring channels and wireways free from projections and rough or sharp edges throughout. At points or edges over which conductors shall pass and may be subject to injury or wear, grind to make a smooth contact surface with the conductors. Install insulated bushings at points of entrances and exit of flexible wiring.

I. All interior luminaires shall be UL/ETL/CSA-US listed, “Damp Location” rated at a minimum, with greater protection (UL/ETL/CSA-US “Damp Location” or “Wet Location”) as appropriate or required by code for the application.

J. All exterior luminaires shall be UL/ETL/CSA-US listed, “Wet Location” rated at a minimum (unless otherwise specified). All hardware, including bolts imbedded in lighting pole foundations, shall be stainless steel or equivalent marine grade resistant.

2.5 FINISHES
A. The paint finish/color may affect the heat dissipation from luminaires. Apply luminaire finishes after fabrication in a manner that assures a durable wear-resistant surfacing. Prior to finishing, hot clean the surfaces by accepted chemical means, and treat them with corrosion inhibiting

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1536

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 11 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
(phosphating) treatment to assure positive paint-adhesion. Give exposed metal surfaces (brass, bronze, aluminum and others) and finished castings except chromium-plated or stainless-steel parts an even coat of high-grade methacrylate lacquer, or transparent epoxy. Anodize exposed aluminum surfaces for corrosion resistance. Make sheet steel luminaire housing, and iron and steel parts which have not received phosphating treatment, or which are to be utilized in exterior applications corrosion resistant by zinc or cadmium plating or hot-dip zinc galvanizing after completion of all forming, welding, or drilling operations.

B. Electroplate parts operated under temperatures injurious to hot-dipped galvanizing.

C. Cadmium plate screws, bolts, nuts and other fastening or latching hardware.

D. Except where otherwise indicated provide luminaires with a final synthetic, high-temperature baked enamel coating of color and finish as specified or directed. Unless otherwise specified, provide white baked enamel "reflective" surfaces, with a minimum reflectance of 86 percent.

Unless otherwise specified, provide potentially visible non-reflective surfaces with a matte-black baked enamel finish. Prior to painting give all parts proper etched surface preparation to assure paint adherence and durability.

2.6 COMPONENTS
A. General:

1. Provide identical power supply and gear within each luminaire type. Provide power supplies and gear that are suitable and UL-listed for the electrical characteristics of the supply circuits to which they are to be connected and which are suitable for operating LED or relevant light sources, including future LED replacement lamps.

2. Unless otherwise specified, provide power supplies and control gear of same type and same manufacturer for ease of stocking and replacement.

3. Components shall be configured and installed in luminaire by the luminaire manufacturer.

4. Components shall not contain Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) and shall be labeled “No PCBs”.

5. Gear housing shall be constructed of painted metal with no sharp edges.

6. Provide only luminaires whose design, fabrication and assembly prevent overheating or cycling of light engines or power supplies under any condition of use.

7. Electronic ballasts shall meet the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission Rules and Regulations, Part 18, Part C (RF Lighting Devices) Non-consumer equipment, regarding radio frequency interference (RFI) (radiated) and electromagnetic interference (EMI) (power line conducted).

8. Submit gear details with luminaire shop drawings.

2.7 TRANSFORMERS FOR LOW-VOLTAGE LUMINAIRES
A. General:

1. Each transformer controlled by a dimmer shall have a suitable choke to eliminate noise during dimming.

2. Secondary wiring shall meet all requirements of this Division and of all applicable local codes. Additionally, secondary wiring shall be sized so that the total average voltage drop on the transformer secondary side does not exceed 3 percent.

3. Source operating voltage, as measured at the socket, shall be between 11.5-12.1 volt for nominal 12-volt sources, and between 23.0-24.2 volt for nominal 24-volt sources.

Contractor shall demonstrate that voltage is within this range if requested.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1537

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 12 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
B. Where a remote transformer is required for interior installations, provide a UL listed remote low voltage power supply which meets or exceeds the following requirements, in addition to those of Paragraph A above.

1. Power supply shall contain a toroidal transformer, primary circuit breaker, and thermal protection.

2. Power supply shall be UL listed, suitable for surface or recessed mounting in both walls and ceilings and require zero clearance to combustible materials.

2.8 SOURCES
A. General:

1. Provide electric sources as required, during construction, including sources for luminaires provided by others.

2. Submit catalogue cuts of all sources to be used in the Work, along with the shop drawing submittal.

B. Solid State Lighting / Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources and Luminaires:

1. General:
a. Luminaire manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the manufacture and design of LED products and systems and no less than one hundred (100) North American installations.
b. Unless otherwise specified, luminaire fabrication shall integrate all LED light sources and power/data supplies fabricated by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility. c. All components peripheral devices, integrated photosensors, occupancy/vacancy sensors, controllers, even if manufactured or provided by others, shall be the responsibility of a single entity, the luminaire manufacturer. All components shall perform successfully as a complete system. Integrated controls shall be programmed onsite to operate as described in Lighting Control Intent Narrative documents or Appendix - Luminaire Schedule.
d. Provide submittals as described in Part 1 above.
e. Provide two (2) samples of each separate manufacturer and type of LED luminaire if requested in Appendix - Luminaire Schedule. Follow procedure for submitting samples as described in Part 1 above.
f. Include all components necessary for a complete installation. Provide all power supplies, synchronizers, data cables, and data terminators for a complete working system.
g. All white light LED sources within the same luminaire type shall be within two (2) MacAdam ellipses/steps of each other.
h. All LED sources used in the LED luminaire shall be of proven quality from established and reputable LED manufacturers and shall have been fabricated within 12 months before installation per the date code on the module. Acceptable LED component or module manufacturers unless otherwise noted are:
1) Cree, Inc.
2) Lumileds
3) Nichia Corporation
4) Norlux
5) Lextar
6) Osram Optronic Semiconductors
7) Xicato
8) Bridgelux
9) Epistar
10) San’an
11) Citizen Electronics
12) General Electric Company

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1538

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 13 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
13) Soraa
14) Samsung
15) Seoul Semiconductor
16) Lumenetix
17) Ledengin

2. Replacement and Spares:
a. Manufacturer shall provide written guarantee of the following:
1) Manufacturer’s LED system or equivalent system will be available for ten (10) years: Manufacturer will provide exact replacement parts, complete replacement luminaires, or provide upgraded parts that are designed to fit into the original luminaire and provide equivalent distribution and lumen output to the original, without any negative consequences.
2) Manufacturer will keep record of original chromaticity coordinates for each LED module and have replacement modules or luminaires from within two (2) MacAdam Ellipses/ steps of the same coordinates available. 3) Manufacturer will keep an inventory or ability to supply replacement parts or complete fixtures within two (2) weeks for component parts or the standard lead time of the original fixture for a complete fixture for duration of warranty period.
b. All parts of system shall be replaceable in the field as specified in Appendix - Luminaire Schedule.
c. System shall carry a full warranty for a minimum of three (3) years from the date of shipment (or longer if required by the project, also refer to Division 1 – General Requirements for further warranty requirements).

3. Products and Components – Performance
a. LED luminaires and components shall be approved by an NRTL facility such as UL, ETL or CSA/US.
b. For applicable fixtures: all products included in system shall use Mil-Std 810F, Random Vibration 7.698g as a minimum standard. In installations subject to vibration, luminaire shall be installed with vibration isolation hardware to sufficiently dampen vibrations.
c. All LED components shall be mercury and lead-free.
d. All manufacturing processes and electronic materials shall conform to the requirements of the European Union's Restriction on the Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronics Equipment (RoHS) Directive, 2002/95/EC. e. LEDs shall comply with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid-State Lighting Products. Color shall remain stable throughout the life of the source. The chromaticity of the installed product shall match IES LM80 data showing that the LED’s do not shift more than .005 DuV from an approved sample or submitted documentation.
f. LEDs testing shall be performed in accordance with IES LM-80 - Approved Method for Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED Packages, Arrays and Modules.
g. LEDs shall have a minimum rated source life of 50,000 hours or as specified in Appendix: Luminaire Schedule. LED “rated source life” shall be determined per IES TM-21 - Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources based on LM-80 test data. Calculated lifetimes not exceeding testing hours per TM-21 are not accepted.
h. Luminaire assembly shall include a method of dissipating heat to prevent degradation of source life, electronic equipment, or lenses. LED luminaire housing shall be designed to transfer heat from the LED board to the outside environment.

Luminaire housing shall have no negative impact on life of components. High power LED luminaires shall be thermally protected using one or more of the following thermal management techniques: metal core board, gap pad, and/or internal monitoring firmware

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1539

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 14 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
i. Luminaire shall be tested and suitable to operate under a minimum of two (2) case temperatures: 55°C (131°F) and 85°C (185°F) and a relative humidity under 65%. j. Manufacturer shall supply in writing a range of permissible operating temperatures and relative humidity levels in which system will perform optimally. LEDs shall be adequately protected from moisture or dust in interior applications. k. All hardwired power connections to LED luminaires shall be reverse polarity protected and provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed, shorted or otherwise mis-wired during the installation process. l. LEDs shall not be overdriven beyond their specified nominal voltage and current. m. Manufacturer shall be able to provide supporting documentation of the product meeting third party regulatory compliance.
n. Manufacturer shall ensure that products undergo and successfully meet appropriate design and manufacturability testing including Design Failure Mode & Effects Analysis, Process Failure Mode & Effects Analysis, Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests, IEC standards and UL/CE testing. o. Manufacturer shall provide Luminaire Efficacy (lm/W), total luminous flux (lumens), luminous intensity (candelas), chromaticity coordinates, CCT and CRI. optical performance, polar diagrams, and relevant luminance and illuminance photometric data. Provide data in IES file format in accordance with testing standards IES LM79-08 and IES LM-82-12, based on test results from an independent Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited laboratory.

4. All color characteristics, CCT, CRI, Color Fidelity, CIE Chromaticity Coordinates shall be consistent across the entire dimming range.

5. Luminaires shall have less than 30% flicker at frequencies of 200Hz or below at 100% and 20% light output and/or meet IEEE standard PAR 1789.

C. LED Power Supplies/ Drivers:

1. LED driver shall have a minimum 50,000 hour published life while operating at maximum case temperature and 65 percent non-condensing relative humidity.

2. Driver shall be Sound Rated A+.

3. Driver shall be > 80% efficient at full load across all input voltages.

4. Driver shall include ability to turn off at low control input rather than holding at a minimum dimming level and shall consume 0.5 Watts or less in standby/off mode. Control deadband at low control input shall be included to allow for voltage variation of incoming signal without causing noticeable variation in luminaire to luminaire output.

5. Drivers shall track evenly across multiple luminaires at all light levels and shall have an input signal to output light level that allows smooth adjustment over the entire dimming range.

6. Control Input:
a. 4-Wire (0-10V DC Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers 1) Must meet IEC 60929 Annex E for General White Lighting LED drivers. 2) Connect to devices compatible with 0 to 10V Analog Control Protocol, Class 2, capable of sinking 0.6 ma per driver at a low end of 0.3V. 3) Must meet ESTA E1.3 for RGBW LED drivers.
b. Digital (DALI Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers 1) Must meet IEC 62386.
c. Digital Multiplex 512 (DMX Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers 1) Must meet DMX / RDM: USITT DMX512A and ANSI E1.20 (Explore & Address).
2) Must be capable of signal interpolation and smoothing of color and intensity transitions.

D. Other:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1540

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 15 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

1. For other luminaires, provide sources as specified. If specification is not complete, request clarification before ordering equipment.

2.9 REFLECTORS
A. Reflectors:

1. Provide reflectors and reflecting cones or baffles fabricated from aluminum/plastic reflector sheet no less than minimum thickness listed below for each application, Reflector shall be absolutely free of tooling marks including spinning lines, and free of marks or indentation caused by riveting or other assembly techniques. No rivets, springs, or other hardware shall be visible after installation.
a. Cones: 0.0500in (1.27mm)
b. Wall wash kicker panels in cones: 0.0400in (1.01mm)
c. Reflectors (non-structural: 0.0235in (0.59mm)
d. Louvers/Baffles: 0.0200in (0.50mm)

2. Provide reflectors and baffles of first-quality polished, buffed and anodized finish, "Alzak" or approved equal, and with specular or semi-specular finish color to be clear, unless specified otherwise. Provide reflector and baffles which produce no apparent brightness nor a source image, nor shall any part of the source be visible from 50° above nadir to 90° above nadir (vertical). That is, the reflector shall have a maximum 50° cutoff angle and a minimum 40° shielding angle.

3. Provide other aluminum reflectors where required and formed and finished as noted on drawings and elsewhere in the specifications. Provide only reflectors free from blemishes, scratches, or indentations which would distort their reflective function and finished by means of the "Alzak" process, or approved equal, unless otherwise noted. No rivets, springs, or other hardware shall be visible after installation.

4. For luminaires employing multi-color sources or sources emitting more than one distinct frequency of color, provide reflectors, cones, or baffles with low iridescent coating on all surfaces seen from normal viewing angles.

5. Anodized aluminum reflectors shall have the following characteristics:
a. Specular:
1) 2 mg/in2 (0.31 mg/cm2) minimum Weight of Coating (Anodizing process.

Coating of aluminum oxide: Reference ASTM Test Method B-137) 2) 86 minimum Total Hemispherical Reflectance and 70 minimum Specular Component (Reference ASTM Test Method E-903-82 (testing utilizing a TR1 or TR2 Total Reflectometer is also acceptable pending issuance of ASTM standard))
3) 90 minimum Visual Clarify and 0.03 minimum Diffuseness at 15˚ (c) (Reference ASTM Test Method E-430-78 (1983))
B. Painted Reflectors:

1. Reflectors shall be completely formed before application of primer and enamel color coat or coats.

2. When requested, submit a sufficient quantity of flat steel panels having the identical primer and color coat or coats applied in the same manner as proposed for the contract items.

3. Tests will be required only in case of dispute about reflector characteristics. Tests may be required at any time before or during Contractor's warranty period. Contractor will pay the cost of tests, if required. Reflectors which do not meet the criteria expressed here will be replaced at Contractor's expense, with reflectors meeting specified requirements.

4. Tests:
a. Painted reflectors shall have an initial reflection factor not less than 86 percent in the visible range of 400-700 nanometers as per ASTM Method E-424-71 as determined by independent laboratory test of fading, tested in the following manner: One half of sample shall be covered and remaining half shall be exposed to a 150 watt sunlamp

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1541

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 16 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
placed 1/2in (12.7mm) above reflective surface for 72 hours. Comparison of exposed and unexposed sides shall show no visible fading or deterioration in appearance or reflectance.
b. The percentage of Specular Gloss shall be a minimum of 80 percent as determined by ASTM Method D-532-T, Procedure A.

2.10 LENSES / FACEPLATES / TRIM
A. Where plastic lens is indicated, provide lens of 100 percent virgin acrylic (polymethyl methacrylate), nominal 0.125in (3mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. Lens is to be strain-free, uniform in appearance, and destaticized.

B. Where clear acrylic lens is indicated, provide lens with a minimum visible light transmittance of 92 percent, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where prismatic acrylic lens is indicated, lens shall be composed of 3/16in (4.7mm) square nonconvex prismatic cones of maximum 0.080in (2mm) depth and aligned 45° to the length and width of the lens panel, unless otherwise specified. Lens shall be a minimum of 7.5 oz. per square foot (2289g/m2). Lens shall have minimum 80 percent visible light transmittance.

D. Where diffuse acrylic lens is indicated, lens shall be diffuse frosted white, high transmission acrylic with a minimum 73 percent visible light transmittance unless otherwise indicated. Provide nominal

0.125in (3mm) thick lens unless otherwise specified.

E. Where acrylic “overlay” is indicated, lens shall be supported by other rigid luminaire members, such as louvers or shelves. Lens shall be white or clear, as specified, with a minimum 79 percent visible light transmission for white lenses, and a minimum 83 percent transmission for clear lenses. Provide 0.040in (1mm) thick lens unless otherwise indicated.

F. Make lenses, louvers, or other light diffusing elements contained in frames removable, but positively held within the frames so that hinging or other motion of the frame will not cause the diffusing element to drop out.

G. For recessed luminaires with trim that is removable or open for access to the interior of the luminaire, and serves as a ceiling trim, provide trim that is positively held to the luminaire body by adjustable means that permit the trim to be drawn up to the ceiling as tight as necessary to insure complete contact of faceplate with ceiling surrounding the luminaire.

2.11 RATED LOCATION LUMINAIRES
A. General:

1. Provide luminaires designed and manufactured specifically for “rated” (e.g., damp, wet, shower, hazardous) location service. Components, including nuts, bolts, rivets, springs, and similar parts shall be made of materials of effective corrosion resistance, or of materials which have been subjected to finishing treatment which will assure such resistance.

2. Luminaires not otherwise protected with lenses or louvers shall be protected with securely fastened bird screens when used in exterior locations.

3. Provide anodized aluminum for aluminum parts of exterior luminaires that are not specified as requiring a painted finish.

4. All luminaires shall be constructed according to UL procedures, and listed by UL ETL or CSA-US for the appropriate category.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1542

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 17 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

5. All luminaires or equipment located wholly or partly out of doors shall be considered subject to severe marine type corrosive conditions and shall be suitably manufactured and installed.

B. Damp Location:

1. In addition to the requirements of paragraph, above, damp location luminaires shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
a. Provide metal parts of luminaires, which are specified as requiring painting, for use in indoor, outdoor or damp locations, which are painted with suitable weather and/or moisture resisting qualities.
b. Provide luminaires for use outdoors, or in areas designated as damp locations, which are suitably and effectively gasketed to prevent access of moisture into electrical components or enclosing diffusers, lenses or globes. c. Luminaires shall be UL, ETL or CSA-US listed for damp locations.

C. Wet Location:

1. In addition to the requirements of Paragraphs above, wet location luminaires shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
a. Any exposed luminaires shall be UL, ETL or CSA/US rated for wet locations. b. Provide luminaires for use outdoors, or in areas designated as wet locations, which are suitably and effectively gasketed to prevent access of moisture into electrical components or enclosing diffusers, lenses or globes.
c. Provide wet location luminaires with a suitable IP rating for their planned environment, unless otherwise specified in Appendix – Luminaire Schedule. 1) Recessed luminaires suitable for wet location shall have a minimum IP54 rating.
2) Surface mounted luminaires exposed to direct rain, shall have a minimum IP65 rating.
3) Luminaires intended to be cleaned by high pressure waterjet cleaning, shall have a minimum IP66 rating.

2.12 LUMINAIRE DESCRIPTIONS
A. General:

1. Provide luminaires which conform to the above standards and criteria, as indicated on the drawings, and as indicated below and in APPENDIX - Luminaire Schedule.

2. Verify mounting conditions and trim for all luminaire types.

3. Verify all voltages, and verify which luminaires require ducted or plenum air supply or return capability or are to be static.

4. Catalogue or series numbers, when shown herein, are intended to assist in establishing general type or category of luminaires. Provide a luminaire that meets the complete performance descriptions, as well as information provided by detail drawings. Standard catalogue cuts, when included, are for general assistance. Written luminaire descriptions are the primary basis for luminaire specification. The Luminaire Schedule in the Appendix supersedes any legend or schedule on the Electrical Drawings.

5. The terminology "Or Approved Equal" if and only if used on the Luminaire Schedule, means the following: Products fabricated by alternative manufacturers to those listed may be submitted under the terms of the substitution clauses outlined in this Section. The products must meet the specifications in every way. Any substitutions or alternatives may be accepted or rejected without a detailed explanation.

6. Provide timely and written notification of any discrepancies between drawing and specifications before submitting bids. If such discrepancies are not resolved prior to the end of the bid period, the more costly alternative will be considered as included in the bid price. See paragraph above regarding definition of Acceptable Manufacturers.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1543

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 18 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

7. All finishes are to be factory applied, including colored flanges and trims.

B. Spare Parts / Extra Stock:

1. Provide spare parts and extra stock to the Owner upon completion of the work. Extra stock quantities shall be included in main order to prevent additional cost to the Owner. All boxes shall be clearly labeled regarding contents, relevant luminaire type, and description. All spare parts shall be turned over to the Owner's authorized representative, and a receipt in duplicate, signed by the site representative shall be delivered to the Owner's authorized representative.

2. The following spare parts shall be provided as a minimum unless otherwise directed by Owner. Additional spare parts shall be provided as required by mention elsewhere in this specification, other sections of these Specifications, or the Contract Drawings:
a. Power Supplies/LED Drivers: Five (5) percent (but not less than one (1) of each type)
C. LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE: SEE SECTION 26 51 13 APPENDIX LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE AT THE END OF THIS SECTION.

1. Complete specifications for the components (sources, power supplies, LED drivers, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, etc.) of luminaires described below are found above in Part 2.

The Luminaire Schedule below supersedes any similar legend or schedule issued previously or issued concurrently on the Drawings. Provide timely and written notification of any discrepancies before preparing any bids or proceeding with any work.

2. Descriptions for additional luminaire types, specified by the Electrical Engineer, may be located on the Electrical Drawings.

2.13 POLE/LUMINAIRE ASSEMBLIES
A. Supply luminaires, davit arms, brackets, poles, handhole covers, base components, and all other accessories complete by specified manufacturer who will be responsible for proper fitting of all elements.

B. Manufacturer will supply assembly to withstand 100 mph winds with a 1.3 gust factor without permanent deflection.

C. Manufacturer shall be responsible for design of and structural integrity of pole and complete base (i.e., concrete dimensions, rebar requirements, grounding and conduit requirements, drainage and ground compaction requirements under the specific installation conditions for the project).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Install luminaires complete with light sources, as indicated, and with equipment, materials, parts, attachments, devices, aligner and filler clips, hardware, hangers, cables, supports, channels, frames and brackets necessary to make a safe, complete, and fully operative installation.

B. Verify and provide luminaires that are appropriate for the ceiling and mounting conditions of the project.

C. Coordinate with other trades as appropriate to properly interface installation of luminaires with other work.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1544

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 19 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
D. Reject and do not install blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactory luminaires. Replace imperfect or unsatisfactory luminaires, if installed, as directed.

E. Set luminaires, when installed, to be true, and free of light leaks, warps, dents, or other irregularities. No light leaks are permitted at the ceiling line or from any visible part or joint of the luminaires. Install luminaires plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent luminaires, and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved shop drawings. Install all adjacent and continuous luminaires straight and trued, aligned in both plan and elevation. Supply and install alignment rods or joint straps as required to achieve this effect.

F. Provide finish for exposed parts or trims as specified. If not indicated, provide a finish as directed.

G. Do not install reflector cones, aperture plates, lenses, diffusers, louvers, and decorative elements of luminaires until completion of wet work, plastering, painting and general clean-up in the area of the luminaires.

H. Mount luminaires at heights and locations indicated on the Contract Drawings, or as required by Architect. Mounting heights specified or indicated are to be to the bottom of each luminaire for suspended and ceiling-mounted luminaires, and to the center of each luminaire for wall-mounted luminaires, unless otherwise noted. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for luminaires on the job before installation is commenced and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the surface being installed.

I. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70, and all other relevant codes. Supports shall be suitable for local seismic zone.

J. In Mechanical Equipment Rooms, luminaires shall be hung from ceilings after piping and equipment therein has been installed. Exact locations for such luminaires shall be determined at the job site during the course of the Work, in coordination with the mechanical work.

K. Adequately protect the housing of recessed luminaires during installation by internal blocking or framing to prevent distortion of sides, or dislocation of threaded lugs, which, upon completion, shall be in perfect alignment and match the corresponding holes in frames or rims. Holding screws shall be inserted freely without forcing and shall remain easily removable for servicing.

L. Ground non-current-carrying parts of electrical equipment in accordance with UL and NEC provisions.

M. Upon completion of installation of luminaires, and after building circuits have been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then re-test to demonstrate compliance.

Otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with re-testing. Coordinate all test times and requirements with the Architect.

1. For normal and emergency building lighting, upon completion of the installation, conduct an operating test to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this and other relevant sections.

2. Test all wiring with an insulation testing instrument, both before and after connection of luminaires and equipment. The minimum resistance shall be 250,000 ohms.

N. Upon completion of the installation, the luminaires and lighting equipment shall be in first class operating order and free from defects in condition and finish. At time of final inspection, all luminaires and equipment shall be clean, fully lamped, and be complete with required lenses or diffusers, reflectors, side panels, louvers, or other components necessary for the function of the luminaires. Any reflectors, lenses, diffusers, side panels or other parts damaged prior to the final inspection shall be replaced prior to inspection.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1545

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 20 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
O. At the time of substantial completion and prior to field tests, replace lamps (excluding LED lamps and light engines) in interior luminaires which have been operating more than six months, or as work lights, or which are observed to be noticeably dimmed after use and testing during the construction period.

P. Luminaires and sources that are part of the Work of this section shall not be used for work lights during construction, except in Mechanical Equipment rooms. Provide adequate portable or temporary lighting for construction.

Q. Vibration Isolation: Mount and support all luminaires in such a manner to isolate the luminaire from structure-borne vibration, including but not limited to vibration caused by fans, motors, moveable tracks, moveable partitions, portable carts, vehicles, etc.

3.2 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install equipment such as junction and pull boxes, luminaire housings, transformers, power supplies, ballasts, switches and controls, and other apparatus that shall be reached from time to time for operation and maintenance, to be easily accessible and appropriate for mounting and ceiling conditions.

3.3 SUPPORTS
A. Luminaires shall be securely fastened as per manufacturer's instructions. Provide plaster frames or mounting frames for luminaires that require them. Such frames shall be appropriate for the ceiling construction in which they are installed.

B. Provide necessary hardware with luminaires, such as stems, plates, plaster frames, hangers and similar items, for safe support of the luminaire. Provide plaster frames made of non-ferrous metal, or of steel that has been suitably rustproofed after fabrication, as described above.

C. Provide supports for luminaires that are adequate to support the weight of the luminaires.

D. Provide hanging devices which, if visible from normal viewing angles, exactly match luminaire finishes specified, unless otherwise noted.

E. Where necessary to meet fire resistance requirements of Building Code authorities, provide enclosures housing recessed luminaires that are constructed to meet or exceed required fire resistance rating.

F. Provide attachment devices including brackets and cast metal shapes with the requisite rigidity and strength to maintain continuous alignment of installed luminaires. Attach luminaires to ceiling support members, and do not depend upon lathing, plaster or ceiling tile for alignment or support.

G. Provide luminaires mounted in suspended ceilings that are supported by saddle hangers or the bars attached to runners or between crossbars of ceiling systems. Provide mounting splines or other positive means of maintaining alignment and rigidity.

H. Provide supporting members that are surface passivated, and which are primed or paint-dipped to resist corrosion.

I. Provide fastening devices of a positive locking type, which do not require special tools to apply or remove them. Do not use tie wires in place of fastening devices.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1546

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 21 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
J. Contractor is responsible for the necessary suspension system. Contractor shall ascertain the structural reliability of supports provided under other Sections of the specification.

K. Attach reflectors to housings by means of safety chains, which shall prevent reflectors from falling.

No part of the chain may be visible after installation, when viewed from any angle up to 50 degrees from the vertical.

L. Provide pendant or surface mounted luminaires with required mounting devices and accessories, including hickeys, stud-extensions, ball aligners, canopies, and stems. Uniformly maintain the luminaire heights shown on the Contract Drawings or established in the field. The allowable tolerances in individual luminaire mounting shall not exceed 1/4 inch (7mm) and may not vary more than 1/2 inch (14mm) from the mounting height shown on the drawings. Install luminaires hung in continuous runs absolutely level, and in line with each other. Hanging devices shall comply with code requirements.

M. Provide an approved ceiling canopy for each stem, exactly matching specified finishes.

N. Place stems to be vertical and plumb.

O. Provide at least two rigid supports for individually mounted suspended linear luminaires. Where luminaires are ganged, provide supports at 8-0” (2438mm) intervals, unless otherwise indicated.

P. Recessed and semi-recessed luminaires:

1. Support rods or wires shall be provided with a minimum of four rods or wires per luminaire and located not more than 0’-6” (152mm) from each corner of each luminaire.

2. Do not support luminaires by ceiling acoustical panels.

3. Where luminaires of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel, support such luminaires independently or with at least 0’-2 ¾” (19mm) metal channels spanning and wired to the ceiling tees.

4. Provide rods or wires for luminaire support under this section of the specifications.

Q. Seismic Protection for Lighting Luminaires: Provide luminaires and support to meet all applicable local codes and standards.

3.4 AIMING AND ADJUSTMENT:

A. Provide labor and tools for final aiming, focusing and adjustment, under the Architect's and Lighting Consultant’s supervision, of all adjustable luminaires after regular working hours, and after dark in daylighted areas, whenever necessary, at no additional cost to the project. All luminaires shall be locked into place so that the aiming is not disturbed during future replacement of light source or power supply.

B. Request preliminary aiming diagrams during the shop drawing submittals. If aiming diagrams are provided, pre-aim those luminaires during installation or prior to final aiming.

C. If colored or diffusing filters are specified, supply up to four (4) theatrical gels for each luminaire type, in colors to be selected by the Architect after installation. Place alternate gels over the luminaires as requested. When the final colors are selected, order the filters from the manufacturer, and install them. Note that the time between ordering and shipping may be approximately four weeks.

D. When extra lenses, louvers or shields are specified, change accessories until a final selection is made.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1547

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 22 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
E. Note final aiming and locked positions and include that information in the O&M manual.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Immediately prior to occupancy, clean reflector cones, reflectors, aperture plates, lenses, louvers, sources and decorative elements. As per manufacturer's instructions, de-staticize lenses after cleaning, installing them to leave no finger or dirt marks.

B. Upon completion of the luminaire installation and at the time of final inspection, luminaires shall be clean, and free from marks, dust, spotting or other defects. Replace any broken or defective parts prior to final inspection. Replace or make good all defects revealed by final inspection.

C. Protect installed luminaires from damage during the remainder of construction period.

3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. For any luminaire, power supply, LED driver, ballast, or lighting control system, provide a complete and operational system which meets or exceeds the performance specified.

B. The Owner shall provide for or engage an independent commissioning agent to verify that all components and system as a whole meets design intent and to evaluate the Contractor’s work.

This includes evaluation and verification of all adjustable features, such as aiming angles, time clock settings, sensitivity settings, high end trim, fine tuning, customized settings, etc. Provide labor and equipment after normal working hours to correct and adjust system, working with or without direct supervision of commissioning agent until reasonable satisfaction has been achieved.

C. Provide Spares, as described in Part 2 above.

D. Submit a maintenance manual and operational submittals, as called for in Part 1 above, and under the conditions of the relevant General Requirements. After submittal is reviewed, make changes and resubmit, if necessary. After review and approval, this manual will be kept on site for reference use by facility maintenance personnel.

E. Assemble and submit in either a bound 8.5in x 11in (216mm x 279mm) format or electronic format, as confirmed by Owner, an Operation and Maintenance Manual that includes the following:

1. A chart clearly documenting the luminaire, source, power supply, LED driver and/or ballast actually installed for each luminaire type, with product designations sufficient for reordering new product and components to match those installed.
a. For Digital Addressable Fixtures: A chart clearly documenting luminaire type, Make/Model, location, digital address, control address, for client operation and for future maintenance.

2. A current list of lighting distributors, manufacturers and manufacturer's representatives, (for the purposes of replacement, reordering or trouble-shooting). This list shall be keyed to the list of luminaires, sources, power supplies, LED drivers and ballasts, so that the Owner has a name, address and phone number of at least two (2) contacts for each product or component.

3. Shop drawings, technical data sheets, product technical documents, installation instructions, cut sheets, operating instructions, calibration instructions, and troubleshooting guides in the installation, including but not limited to sources, power supplies, LED drivers, ballasts and lighting control devices.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1548

HLB Lighting Design 100% Submittal / Bid Set 265113 - 23 Architectural Luminaires, Sources, and Components
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A

4. Color-coded as-built drawings showing all source, power supply, LED drivers and ballast types, to facilitate replacement. O&M Walk-through: Transfer of the O&M document will include a thorough walk-through and demonstration of equipment by Contractor for facility personnel.

F. Owner Training: At the Owner's convenience, provide a minimum of four (4) hours, not to exceed eight (8) hours, of expertise and training concerning the installation, characteristics, operations and maintenance of the Work of this Section. Such training shall take place after the Owner has been provided the final approved maintenance and operational submittals mentioned above.

G. Video-tape the training session and provide two (2) copies on flash/thumb drives, or DVD.

Alternative electronic formats may be provided if mutually agreed upon.

PART 4 - APPENDICES

4.1 GENERAL
A. The appendices listed below are integral parts of the specifications and contract documents. If either Appendix is missing or incomplete, provide timely and written notification. Do not submit a bid based on incomplete information.

4.2 APPENDIX – LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
A. See Part 2 above for complete specifications for the components (sources, power supplies, LED drivers, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, etc.) of the luminaires described in the Schedule. The Luminaire Schedule below supersedes any similar legend or schedule issued previously or issued concurrently on the drawings. Provide timely and written notification of any discrepancies before preparing any bids or proceeding with any work.

4.3 APPENDIX – LIGHT FIXTURE CUTSHEETS
A. Contractor shall provide luminaires that meet the complete performance descriptions in Part 2 and the Appendix above, along with luminaire detail drawings and sketches. If there are any discrepancies between luminaire descriptions, catalogue numbers, sketches, or catalogue cuts that are unresolved during the bid period, the more costly option will be considered as included in the bid prices. The information in standard catalogue extracts are for general information only, and the product provided must meet all criteria described in the Luminaire Schedule and in this specification section above.

END OF SECTION 265113

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1549
SAN CARLOS DOWNTOWN PHASE 1A
HLB LIGHTING | SAN FRANCISCO
100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET
30 OCTOBER 2025

TYPE LOCATION DESCRIPTION FIXTURE FINISH LAMPS/SOURCE POWER SUPPLY/ DRIVER INPUT WATTS INPUT WATT UNITS LISTING MANUFACTURER NOTES INTERIOR LUMINAIRESF1 Restrooms
Recessed LED linear downlight
Dimensions: 5-7/8" Width x 3-1/2" Depth x 4'-0" Length
Per Architect
LED
3000K
80+ CRI
L70 @ 60,000 hrs
758 Lumens
Integral
DIM 7.8W LFT
NRTL Listed
for Dry
Locations
SELUX
M125
L125R1-1C30-830-DBW-(Mounting)-
04-(Finish)-UV-(Driver)

1. Electrical Engineer/Contractor to verify compatibility of light source, gear and dimmingsystem.

F2 Storage
Suspended LED linear striplight
Dimensions: 4-3/4" Width x 3-13/16" Height x 8'-0" Length White
LED
3500K80 CRI
L70 @ 60,000 hrs
6,000 Lumens
Integral
SWITCH 40.6W EA
cETLus Listed
for Damp Locations
HE Williams
76R
76R-8-L60-835-Suspension-(Driver)-
(Voltage)

1. Bottom of luminaire shall be suspended 8’-0” AFF. Provide suspension length or sufficient length of field-adjustable suspension as required. Luminaire shall be mounted over a surfacemounted junction box (by electrician).

EXTERIOR LUMINAIRESE1 Canopy Structures
Column mounted LED up/down sconce, 57 degree beam
angle, wet listed
Dimensions:

10.20" Height x 2.25" Diameter
Custom RAL
LED
3000K83 CRI
L70 @ 60,000 hrs
876 Lumens
Remote
DIM 10.0W EA
UL Listed for
Wet Locations

HK LIGHTING
ZX16 Series
ZXL16-WM2-NF-A-GSS-UNV-5-30-57-
(Dimming)-CC-OSL
+
Remote Power Supply
+
Custom Canopy

1. Luminaire shall be U.L. (or equivalent approved agency) listed and labeled “Suitable for wet locations.”2. Bottom of luminaire shall be mounted 13’-0” AFF. Architect to verify.3. Electrical Engineer/Contractor to verify compatibility of light source, gear and dimmingsystem.4. Luminaire shall be ordered with necessary gear, control interfaces, power feed cables/terminators and mounting accessories as required for a complete system.5. Locate remote gear in a secure, concealed, accessible and well-ventilated location in compliance with manufacturer’s directions. Contractor/Manufacturer to coordinate remote gear size, location and wire gauge for <2% Voltage drop over entire length of run.

Luminaire Schedule
GENERAL NOTES:- Provide luminaire shop drawings for Lighting Consultant, Architect, and Owner approval prior to fabrication. For all continuous run luminaires, including track, manufacturer shall submit a layout drawing for run lengths specified on architectural drawings during submittal review for Lighting Designer and Architect approval prior to fabrication.- Architect shall verify all luminaire body, trim, flange, pole, track and any other visible accessories/hardware finishes. All visible conduit, junction boxes, canopy plates, hardware, gear containers, etc. shall be painted to match adjacent surfaces (Architect to verify).- Refer to electrical drawings for voltage information. Electrical contractor shall verify all voltages with Electrical Engineer before placing any orders or proceeding with anywork.- Electrical contractor shall verify emergency operation of all luminaires with Electrical Engineer before placing any orders or proceeding with any work. Refer to electricaldrawings for all emergency or code-related requirements.- Contractor shall verify and coordinate recessed luminaire installation and mounting with architectural details, housing type, field conditions, and ceiling system detailsincluding grid type and flange requirements such that there are no light leaks between luminaire and ceiling system and luminaire can accommodate ceiling thickness.- Contractor to verify and coordinate all other luminaire installation and mounting with architectural details and field conditions.- Contractor shall verify mounting details with architect and/or architectural drawings and order all mounting components necessary for installation of luminaire at no additional cost, even if such components are not specifically called for in the contract documents. - Provide adequate and sturdy support for each luminaire. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying weight and mounting method of all luminaires and furnish and installsuitable supports. Luminaire mounting assemblies shall comply with all local seismic codes and regulations. - Provide all luminaires as shown complete with all light sources, completely wired, controlled and securely attached to supports.- Where both narrative and/or pictorial luminaire descriptions are provided, the written description shall take precedence and prevail. Contractor to confirm via RFI processwith lighting designer and architect.- Locations of luminaires are shown diagrammatically. Verify exact location and spacing with architectural drawings and designer at the site during installation. Notify Owner about field conditions at variance with Contract Documents before commencing installation.- At the completion of construction, clean lenses and reflectors of all luminaires so as to render them free of any material, substance or film foreign to the luminaire. Blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactory luminaires shall be replaced in a satisfactory manner.- When applicable, contractor shall review existing circuiting, verify new loads and panel capacity. Contractor shall notify Owner if a conflict between design documents and field conditions occur.- Contractor shall refer to electrical drawings for information on controls and dimming requirements, and coordinate luminaire and control accessories required for a fully functioning system.- Contractor to provide line item pricing at bid phase or earlier as requested by lighting designer or architect per type with labor and installation shown as separate line items.- All 0-10V dimming gear provided shall be isolated to avoid AC interferance on the dimming line.- All LED sources within the same luminaire Type shall be within two (2) MacAdam ellipses/steps of each other.- For all adjustable luminaires provide labor and materials for final aiming and locking of all adjustable luminaires under the Architect's supervision. Aiming shall take place immediately before building is turned over to Owner, after regular working hours where required. Contractor shall coordinate necessary personnel and equipment- All luminaires shall have a minimum 3-year warranty.- All lighting systems shall be ordered with necessary gear, power feeds and mounting accessories as required for installation of a complete system.- Locate remote gear in a secure, concealed, accessible and well-ventilated location in compliance with manufacturer’s directions.- All luminaires and workmanship shall be guaranteed free of defects and fully operational for a minimum of one year after the acceptance of the project by the Owner unlessotherwise indicated in the specifications. Any luminaires or workmanship found to be defective during the warranty period shall either be fixed or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. - The luminaires and workmanship must be in accordance with and meet the standards and regulations of the following: Underwriters Laboratories, National Electric Code, &Local Building and Life Safety Code Agencies.- Replace all burned-out or inoperative sources and gear in all luminaires before the building is accepted by the Owner so that all luminaires will be in first class operatingcondition.- For pendant mounted luminaires provide adequate cord length to suspend luminaires at heights shown on architectural drawings or indicated in the lighting fixture schedule.- Electrical contractor shall field-verify each run length of continuous fixtures prior to ordering.- Provide luminaire samples per type as requested in the Fixture Schedule. Supply a completely operable luminaire with cord and plug for standard 120 Volt service. - Code required accessories and controls such as but not limited to motion sensors, photocell controls, dimming controls, etc. to be specified and coordinated by ElectricalEngineer.- Contractor shall follow all manufacturer installation instructions and inform the Architect if there is a conflict with design documents.

ARCHITECTURAL LUMINAIRES, SOURCES, AND COMPONENTSAPPENDIX - LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE 26 51 13 A - 1 November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1550
SAN CARLOS DOWNTOWN PHASE 1A
HLB LIGHTING | SAN FRANCISCO
100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET
30 OCTOBER 2025

TYPE LOCATION DESCRIPTION FIXTURE FINISH LAMPS/SOURCE POWER SUPPLY/ DRIVER INPUT WATTS INPUT WATT UNITS LISTING MANUFACTURER NOTES E1A Canopy Structures
Column mounted LED uplight sconce, 57 degree beam angle, wet listed
Dimensions:

5.75" Height x 2.25" Diameter
Custom RAL
LED
3000K83 CRI
L70 @ 60,000 hrs
500 Lumens
Remote
DIM 5.0W EA
UL Listed for
Wet Locations

HK LIGHTING
ZWL16 Series
ZWL16-OR1-S-A-CCC-012V-05W-30-EGSS-OSL
+
Remote Power Supply
+
Custom Canopy

1. Luminaire shall be U.L. (or equivalent approved agency) listed and labeled “Suitable for wet locations.”2. Bottom of luminaire shall be mounted 13’-0” AFF. Architect to verify.3. Electrical Engineer/Contractor to verify compatibility of light source, gear and dimmingsystem.4. Luminaire shall be ordered with necessary gear, control interfaces, power feed cables/terminators and mounting accessories as required for a complete system.5. Locate remote gear in a secure, concealed, accessible and well-ventilated location in compliance with manufacturer’s directions. Contractor/Manufacturer to coordinate remote gear size, location and wire gauge for <2% Voltage drop over entire length of run.

E2 Restroom Building
Recessed LED linear downlight, wet listed
Dimensions:
3-3/4" Height x 2-3/8" Width x Length per Plans
Per Architect
LED
3000K80 CRI
L90 @ 50,000 hrs
350 Lumens/ft
Integral
DIM 3.5W LFT
ETL Listed for
dry/damp
Locations
Lumenwerx
V2SEALR-D-IP44-EPDO-SW-80CRI350LF-30K-(length per plans)- (voltage)-(driver)-1C-(power feed)-
DTR-(finish)

1. Luminaire shall be U.L. (or equivalent approved agency) listed and labeled “Suitable for wet locations.”2. Electrical Engineer/Contractor to verify compatibility of light source, gear and dimmingsystem.3. Modular units to be installed for a continuous run condition as shown on drawing. Refer to architectural drawings for length of continuous runs, contractor shall provide an optimal combination of luminaire lengths to provide a continuous run as shown on architectural drawings.

E3 Restroom Building
4" Apperture recessed LED downlight, 58 degree optics, wet listed
Dimensions:
4-3/8" Diamater x 2-3/4" Height
Per Architect
LED
3000K90 CRI
L70 @ 60,000 hrs
1,211 Lumens
Integral
SWITCH 12.3W EA
NRTL Listed
for Wet
Locations
BEGA
24386-K3-(finish)

1. Luminaire shall be U.L. (or equivalent approved agency) listed and labeled “Suitable for wet locations.” R1 Plaza
Pole mounted area light, Type 3 distribution, mounted to 14' pole
Dimensions: 17-3/4" Diameter x 34-7/8" Height;
14' pole
Custom RAL 7037
Medium Grey
LED
3000K
75 CRI
L70 @ 100,000 hrs
8,616 Lumens
Integral
DIM 80.0W EA UL Listed for Wet Locations
LUMEC
UrbanScape
MPTC-80W48LED-3K-G3-LE3-UNV-
(Driver)-(Receptical)-(Control)-
(Luminaire)-(Mounting)-APR4-F-14-
PSPCS-RAL7037

1. Luminaire shall be U.L. (or equivalent approved agency) listed and labeled “Suitable for wet locations.”

2. Refer to base and anchorage detail by Architect / Civil Engineer. Provided pole shall meet local and AASHTO requirements for EPA of luminaire configuration. Architect / Civil Engineer shall coordinate pole anchorage detail to concrete base. 3. Electrical Engineer/Contractor to verify compatibility of light source, gear and dimmingsystem.4. Color: RAL GY3TX Medium Grey R3 Plaza
Catenary mounted LED festoon stringlight, wet listed
Dimensions:
1-7/8" Height x 1-5/8" Diameter x Length per Plans
Custom RAL 7037
Medium Grey

LED LAMP
2700K80 CRI
L70 @ 60,000 hrs
150 Lumens
Integral
SWITCH 1.5W EA
ETL Listed for
Wet Locations
PRIMUS
Festoon Lighting System
DSW-24-S14-C-27-150-(Termination
Kit)-(Length per Plans)
+
Poles/Suspension Cables

1. Luminaire shall be U.L. (or equivalent approved agency) listed and labeled “Suitable for wet locations.”2. Refer to architectural drawings for length of suspension cable runs, for quantity and location.3. Luminaires shall be mounted at 18'-0" AFF. Refer to structural drawings for pole details.4. Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware and accessories as required for a complete and approved installation, including but not limited to the suspension cable.5. See Structural Drawings for Pole. Pole Color: Match the Lumec GY3TX Medium Grey ARCHITECTURAL LUMINAIRES, SOURCES, AND COMPONENTSAPPENDIX - LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE 26 51 13 A - 2 November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1551
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
San Carlos
Downtown Phase 1A

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1552
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

F1